2015 Mirage PDF

BK0212400US.
book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分
Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

appear.
N09200102127
These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI MIRAGE.
instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered cle.
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the MIRAGE. The Owner’s Manual
Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist in the operation
instructions are not followed.
and maintenance of your vehicle.
Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you

with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
your vehicle. personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all MIRAGE models and You will see another important symbol:
explains all features including options. Some features explained in this NOTE Gives helpful information.
manual may not be installed on your vehicle.
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. WARNING
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-  Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
tained here. nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products. This vehicle is manufactured by Mitsubishi Motors (Thailand) Co.,Ltd. in Thailand under
license from Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
©2014 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Thailand

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202629
Instrument cluster P.5-62
Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-77
Wiper and washer switch P.5-78

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-74 Rear window wiper and washer switch P.5-79
Turn-signal lever P.5-76
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-77
Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) P.5-52
Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13

Ignition switch (if so equipped)
P.5-35
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch
P.5-50
Electric remote-controlled outside rearview Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air-
mirror switch P.5-33 bag (for driver)
P.4-21, 4-27
Horn switch P.5-81
Steering wheel height adjust- Steering wheel remote control switches (if so
ment P.5-32 equipped) P.5-83, 7-37
Supplemental restraint system-driver’s knee airbag

P.4-27
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls
1
Center vents P.7-2 Heater (if so equipped) P.7-4
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-18 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air- Manual air conditioning (if so
Mitsubishi Multi Entertainment System bag (for front passenger) P.4-21, 4-27 equipped) P.7-7
(if so equipped)
Refer to the separate “Mitsubishi Multi
Entertainment System owner’s manual”
Clock (if so equipped) P.7-24
Electric rear window defogger switch

P.5-80
Automatic air conditioning (if so
Side vents P.7-2 equipped) P.7-11
Engine hood release lever P.9-4 Glove compartment

P.5-108
Cup holder (for the front
seat) P.5-108 12 V power outlets
P.5-106 Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-80
Key slot (if so equipped)
P.5-20
Fuel tank filler door release lever Gearshift lever (if so equipped) P.5-38
P.3-3 Selector lever (if so equipped) P.5-39
Parking brake lever P.5-31
Cup holder (for the rear seat)

P.5-108
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Overview 1-2
Interior
1 Interior
N00100302343
Power window lock switch P.5-29 Bottle holders P.5-108
Microphone P.5-83
Sun visors P.5-105

Power door lock switch (if so Vanity mirror P.5-105 Dome light P.5-106, 9-27
equipped) P.5-26 Card holder P.5-105
Inside rearview mirror P.5-32
Power window switch P.5-29

Head restraints
Seat belts P.4-8 P.4-7
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-

curtain airbags P.4-32
USB input terminal (if so
equipped)
Manual window control P.5-101
Heated seats (if so
equipped) P.4-4
Cargo room light
P.5-107, 9-27 Front seats P.4-2
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS)-side airbag (for front seat)
Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)
P.4-31
P.5-109
Jack (if so equipped) P.8-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
Rear seats P.4-5
dedby:
1-3 Overview
Luggage area
Luggage area 1
N00100500455
Type 1 Type 2
Tether anchors for child restraint system

Tether anchors for child restraint system P.4-16
P.4-16
Tools P.8-5
Spare wheel P.8-12 Tools P.8-5

Tire repair kit P.8-6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Overview 1-4
Outside
1 Outside
N00100602535
Antenna P.7-41
Power window (if so equipped) P.5-29
Windshield wipers P.5-78 Outside rearview mirrors P.5-33

Side turn-signal lights (if so equipped)
P.9-26
Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Engine hood P.9-4
F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

Security Transmitter) (if so equipped)
P.5-9
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
P.5-6
Locking and unlocking P.5-24
Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)

P.5-76, 9-26
Front side- marker lights

Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-74, 9-26, 9-28
P.5-77, 9-26, 9-29 Front turn signal lights
P.5-76, 9-26, 9-28
Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped)
Parking lights P.5-74, 9-26, 9-27
P.5-74, 9-26, 9-29
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-5 Overview
Outside
High-mounted stop light

P.9-26
Rear spoiler
Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)
P.5-56
Changing tires P.8-11
Size of tires and wheels Rear window wiper and washer
P.11-5 P.5-79
Tire inflation pressure
P.9-14
Tire rotation P.9-16
Tire chains P.9-17
Liftgate P.5-27
Rear side- marker lights/Tail and stop lights

P.9-26, 9-30 Rear-view camera
Rear turn signal lights
P.5-76, 9-26, 9-30 Licence plate lights
P.9-26, 9-31
Back-up light P.9-26, 9-30
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Overview 1-6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200701136
NOTE
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-73
tance.
Charging system warning light

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-15
tance.
(Illuminates and intermittent sounds)
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil
level.
If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked P. 5-73
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
Oil pressure warning light as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Quick index 2-1


 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
2 released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-72
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing.
Selector lever position indicator in the P. 5-42
If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized
instrument cluster flasher rapidly
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
(once per second)
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-72
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or towing company for assistance.
“Check engine light”)
 If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the
steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors P. 5-48
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Electric power steering system (EPS)
warning light
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-2 Quick index


 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning. 2
Test the system as described on page 5-47. P. 5-47
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-27
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light
 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Selector lever position indicator in the P. 5-42
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
instrument cluster flasher slowly
(every 2 seconds)
Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
and  If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
P. 5-51
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
as possible.
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator  When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Quick index 2-3


2 Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-46
as possible.
ASC indicator  When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.
Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.
 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-14.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving. P. 5-56
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
Tire pressure monitoring system warn- ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
ing light (if so equipped) mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200900870
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key.
(except for vehicles equipped
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
From “ACC” to “OFF”
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
P. 5-35
Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
F.A.S.T.-key) Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal. P. 5-16
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.
ate.
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console, and then start the engine or P. 5-19
(for vehicles equipped with the
change the operation mode.
F.A.S.T.-key)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Quick index 2-5


Cannot shift the selector lever
2 from the “P” (PARK) position. Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-39
(for vehicles with continuously Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
variable transmission (CVT))
The windows are fogged up.
Vehicles equipped with the heater without air conditioning function or the manual air
conditioning:
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. P. 7-6, 7-10,
2. Turn on the blower. 7-13
Vehicles equipped with the automatic air conditioning:
Push the defogger switch to change the “ ” mode.
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
P. 9-10
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
The high coolant temperature
warning light is illuminates.
The engine is overheated.

P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Steam comes out of the engine

compartment. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-6 Quick index


The vehicle is stuck in sand,
mud or snow
Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. P. 8-18 2
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

The brakes are not functioning
properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P. 6-5
or stream.
The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift
change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT.
initial movement of the vehicle Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of P. 5-42
is slow when the vehicle starts your choice.
moving.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6,
2. If your vehicles equipped with the tire repair kit, repair the flat tire with tire repair kit.
P. 8-11
If your vehicles equipped with the spare tire, replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Quick index 2-7

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
Methanol
N00301000912
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly. taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
filler pipe specifically designed to accept only type of alcohol could adversely affect the
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens- vehicle’s performance and damage critical
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on

WARNING unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
Reformulated gasoline
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.
sive. You could be burned, seriously Many areas of the country require the use of
injured or killed when handling it. When-
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the Oxygenated gasoline lated Gasoline”.
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- Gasoline sold at some service stations con- and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
door areas. tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although emissions and improve air quality.
the oxygenates may not be identified by those Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
names. Oxygenates are required in some ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
CAUTION areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will your vehicle. adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and durability of the engine and fuel system.
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Ethanol (Gasohol)
line is illegal, and will void your warranty
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl
and oxygen sensors. A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco- manganese tricarbonyl)
hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
in your vehicle, provided the octane number MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
Gasoline detergent additives is at least as high as that recommended for additive that is blended into some gasolines
unleaded gasoline. to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi
In the United States, fuel suppliers are Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-
required by law to add detergents to their gas- I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: lines without MMT.
3-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
adversely affect performance, and cause the
NOTE WARNING
 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
malfunction indicator on your instrument
such as hard starting, stalling during idling, sive. You could be burned, seriously
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera- injured or killed when handling it. When
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a tion. If you experience any of these prob- refueling your vehicle, always turn the 3
repair facility of your choice for assistance. lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. engine off and keep away from flames,
If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- sparks, and smoking materials. Always
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
Sulfur in gasoline light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as areas.
soon as possible by the nearest authorized  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility be sure to get rid of your body’s static
isfy California’s low-emission regulations of your choice. electricity by touching a metal part of the
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel your body could create a spark that
than California is allowed to have a higher system and engine, resulting in hard starting ignites fuel vapor.
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could and poor acceleration. If these problems  Perform the whole refueling process
occur, you are advised to add a detergent (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the ing the fuel tank filler cap, etc.) by your-
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos- self; do not let any other person near the
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or its, thereby returning the engine to a normal fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to
“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina- condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi help you and that person was carrying
tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an static electricity, fuel vapor could be
gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi- unsuitable additive could make an engine ignited.
cle’s emission-control system is malfunction- malfunction. For details, please contact the  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. until refueling is finished. If you moved
dealer may suggest using a different, lower- away and did something else (for example,
sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter- sitting on a seat) part-way through the
mine if the problem is fuel-related. Filling the fuel tank refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
N00301100913
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances.
WARNING
 Keep the doors and windows closed while
 When handling fuel, comply with the
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
safety regulations displayed by garages
fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
and filling
I
nfstations.
or
mati
onPr
ovidedby:
General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank
Fuel tank capacity WARNING

 Since the fuel system may be under pres-
9.2 gal (35 L) sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
3 uum that might have built up in the fuel
Refueling tank. If the fuel tank filler cap is venting
vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. until the sound stops before removing the
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear fuel tank filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
driver side of your vehicle. spray out, injuring you or others.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened
1- Remove
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank 5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly
2- Close
filler door release lever located at the left on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
side of the driver’s seat. zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tank zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it
filler cap cord on the hook located on the goes.
inside surface of the fuel tank filler door.
CAUTION
 Your vehicle can only be operated using
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
lytic converter damage will result if leaded
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and
consequently, this must never be attempted.
6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly not add more fuel.
turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
clockwise.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
CAUTION NOTE UNDER WARRANTY.
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not  If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could driving, the engine malfunction indicator Examples of modifications to your vehicle
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint- (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it engine light”) may come on when the
that can cause damage or performance prob- 3
lems include the following:
off with a soft cloth. onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
a self check.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap parts
you hear at least 3 clicks.
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking The indicator will go off after several driving  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con-  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
filler door closed. tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as emission, suspension, engine, drive train
WARNING soon as possible. or electrical wiring systems
 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is  Modification of any onboard com-
securely closed. If the fuel tank filler cap puter/control module, including repro-
were loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a
fire.
Modifications to and racing gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
any onboard computer/control module
of your vehicle
N00301600194
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
CAUTION This vehicle should not be modified with ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. erage.
use only the fuel tank filler cap specified for Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures
your model vehicle. high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
Installation of accessories
safety and durability. Modifications using
N00301700212
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil- CAUTION
ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-  Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
ble state and/or federal regulations. ries are installed, consult an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

 The installation of accessories, optional accessory which may involve modification of
parts, etc., should only be performed
WARNING the electrical or fuel systems.
 While driving, do not use a cellular phone
within the limits prescribed by law, and in
in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-
accordance with the guidelines and warn- CAUTION
thing, including cellular phone usage, that
3 ings contained within the documents distracts you from the safe operation of  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
accompanying this vehicle. your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces- dent. sory fitment or modification.
sories should be fitted to your vehicle. Refer to and follow all state and local laws If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
 Improper installation of electrical parts in your area regarding cellular phone improper installation methods are used (pro-
could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica- usage while driving. tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel devices may be adversely affected, resulting
systems” section within this owner’s man- in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
ual. Important point!
 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside
the vehicle without an external antenna Due to the large number of accessory and Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
may cause electrical system interference, replacement parts provided by different man- parts
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos- N00301400219
tion. sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
dealer to check whether the attachment or
ifications must not be used. designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
Refer to the “Specifications” section for dards of performance, and are recommended
ine parts affects the driving safety of your
information regarding wheel and tire for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
Mitsubishi-vehicle.
sizes. able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
Modification/alterations to the your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
electrical or fuel systems vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
N00301800183
authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
lor your new vehicle to your own personal
Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
Parts Manager has information on various
important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
audio systems, protection items, as well as
Motors dealer before installation of any
interior and exterior accessories available for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: your specific model.
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as 3

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
waste/perchlorate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints .................................................................................4-7
Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-8
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-12
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-13
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-14
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-20
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-21
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seats
Seats
N00408400509
locks also are safety equipment, which must

1 - Front seats Seats and restraint systems be used correctly.
N00401600212
 To adjust the seat forward or back-
Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety Always check the following before you drive:
wardPage 4-3
features that help protect you and your pas-
 To adjust the seatbacks Page 4-3  That everyone in your vehicle is properly
sengers in an accident.
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat wearing their seat belt.
Seat belts are the most important safety
only, if so equipped) Page 4-4  That infants and small children are prop-
device. When worn properly, seat belts can
 Heated seats (if so equipped) Page 4-4 erly secured in an appropriate child
reduce the chance of serious injury or death
in various types of crashes. For added protec- restraint system in the rear seat.
2 - Rear seats tion during a severe frontal collision, your  That all doors are fully closed and locked.
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System  That seatbacks are upright, with head
 Folding the seatbacks forward Page 4-6 (SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen- restraints properly adjusted.
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Front seats
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. How-
WARNING To adjust the seat forward or
ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious backward
injury or death during deployment of the
death by following the instructions in this N00401900316
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
manual. seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
back as possible while maintaining a posi- seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the 4
Front seats tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, seat in place.
N00401800403
and safely operate the vehicle.
Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-  To reduce the risk to the front passenger
ble while maintaining a position that still of serious injury or death during deploy-
enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
control the steering wheel and safely operate properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
the vehicle. front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
 Always place children 12 years old and
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
child restraint systems.
CAUTION
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an WARNING
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
 To make sure that the seat is securely
pected accident might occur.
locked, try to move it forward or back-
 Do not place a cushion or the like between
ward without using the adjusting lever.
your back and the seatback while driving.
The effectiveness of the head restraints will
be reduced in the event of an accident.
WARNING  When sliding the seats, be careful not to To adjust the seatbacks
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while catch your hand or leg. N00402000369
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,
trol and result in an accident.
pay careful attention to the rear seat passen- gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
 After adjusting the seat, make sure that gers.
seat is securely locked into position. lean backward to a comfortable position and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
release the lever. The seatback will lock in
place.
WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against 1- To move the seat cushion up
the body during an accident, there is 2- To move the seat cushion down
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
CAUTION Heated seats (if so equipped)
 The reclining mechanism used in the seat- N00435601418
back is spring loaded, and will cause the To adjust the seat height
seatback to return quickly to the vertical The heated seats can be operated by pushing
position when the lock lever is operated.
(Driver’s seat only, if so the switch when the ignition switch or the
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat- equipped) operation mode is in ON. The indicator light
back or hold the seatback with your hand to N00402100243 (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
control its return motion. To adjust the seat height, turn the dial as
shown in the illustration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear seats
CAUTION Rear seats

 Switch off the heated seats when not in use. N00402500221
Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for
quick heating. After the seat has become WARNING
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-  Never adjust the seats to make a cargo
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
seat temperature may be felt while using the
area when the vehicle is in motion or on a
slope. The seats could move more than
4
heated seats. This is caused by the operation necessary or move suddenly causing a
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does serious accident and/or injury.
not indicate a malfunction.  After folding down a seat or returning a
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or seat back to its original position, make
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating) stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects sure the seat is firmly secured. Also check
2- Heater off into the seat. to make sure that the seat belts are in
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat  Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other front of the seatbacks, and not caught
warm) insulating material on the seat while using behind the seatbacks. If the seat is not
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele- secured, it could move causing a serious
ment to overheat. accident and/or injury.
WARNING  When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,  Do not allow anyone to ride in the cargo
 Persons who are unable to feel tempera- kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic area while the vehicle is in motion. People
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- solvents; doing so can cause damage not who are not properly seated and
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, only to the surface of the seat, but also to the restrained can be seriously injured or
fatigue or other physical conditions or heater. killed in an accident.
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the  The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
when using the heated seat even at low seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before should never be used as a play area by
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns, attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater children. All children should be properly
people with such conditions must use care off immediately if it appears to be malfunc- restrained in a restraint device that offers
when using the heated seat. tioning during use. the maximum protection for their size and
age. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on
page 4-14.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear seats
CAUTION NOTE
 In the cargo area, do not load luggage or  If the seat belt interferes with luggage, unfas-
cargo higher than the top of the seats and ten the seat belt guide to release the seat belt
make sure that it is firmly secured. Restricted and store the seat belt latch plate as shown in
rear vision or flying objects entering the pas- the illustration.
senger compartment during sudden braking
4 could result in a serious accident and/or
injury.
 Seatbacks should always be folded and put
back into their normal position by an adult.
 When adjusting the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand. Personal injury could 3. Pull the left or right release straps (B), and
result.
fold the rear seatbacks forward.
Folding the seatbacks forward

N00402901222
To return
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to 1. Make sure that the seat belt for the out-
provide additional luggage compartment board seating position is passed through
space. the seat belt guide or the seat belt latch
plate for the outboard seating position is
To fold stored.
2. Raise the seatback until it locks securely
1. Place each head restraint in its lowest into place.
position. (Refer to “Head restraints” on After returning the seatback to its normal
page 4-7.) position, gently shake the seat and seat-
2. Make sure that the seat belt for the out- back to make sure they are firmly secured.
board seating position is passed through
the seat belt guide strap (A) and the seat
belt guide is fastened as shown in the
illustration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Head restraints
WARNING Adjustment of the head

 After returning the seatbacks to their restraint height
upright positions, make sure that the seat-
backs are locked in place and firmly.
Also check to be sure that the rear seat To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
belts are in front of the seatbacks, and not adjust the head restraint height so that the
caught behind the seatbacks. center of the restraint is at your ear level 4
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their ear level when seated
CAUTION should raise the restraint to the highest locked
 Do not grab the seat belt guide to raise the position.
seatback; doing so can cause damage of the
seat belt guide and the seatback. WARNING  To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
 Driving without the head restraints in  To lower the restraint, push down on it
place can cause you and your passengers while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
serious injury or death in an accident. To direction shown by the arrow.
Head restraints reduce the risk of injury in an accident,  After adjusting the height, push down on
N00404300584 always make sure the head restraints are
the restraint to make sure it is locked in
Padded head restraints for the seats can installed and properly positioned when
position.
reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your the seat is occupied.
vehicle is hit from the rear.  In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the front seat-
The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
back must be adjusted to the upright posi-
trated position.
tion, the rear seatback to the normal
To maximize the effectiveness of your head seating position, and the head restraint to
restraint, adjust the front seatback to the the proper position before vehicle opera-
upright position, the rear seatback to the nor- tion. The driver should never adjust the
mal seating position, and the head restraint to seat while the vehicle is in motion.
the proper position. Sit back against the seat-  Never place a cushion or similar device on
back with your head close to the head the seatback. This can adversely affect
restraint. head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Seat belts
pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
To remove locks into place.
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction
shown by the arrows. Then pull the head CAUTION
restraint up and out of the seatback.  Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
4 as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
seatback.
Seat belts
N00406001481
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help

reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
senger in the event of an accident. Always
WARNING use the provided seat belts.
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in Carefully review the following information
the event of an accident, the head for proper seat belt usage.
restraints must be properly installed and
positioned to proper height before vehicle CAUTION
operation.  The shape and size of the head restraint dif- WARNING
fers according to the seat. Always use the  To help reduce the risk of injury or death
correct head restraint provided for the seat in an accident, seat belts and child
and do not install the head restraint in the restraint systems must always be used.
To install wrong direction. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page
4-14 for additional information.
First check that the head restraint is facing in  Never use one seat belt for more than one
the right direction as shown in the previous person.
illustration, and then insert it into the seat-  Never carry more people in your vehicle
than there are seat belts.
back. Push the head restraint down while
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:  Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.

Seat belts
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
WARNING WARNING retractor in the event of a sudden change in
 Always place the shoulder belt over your  Children 12 years old and under should
the vehicle’s motion.
shoulder and across your chest. Never put always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
it behind you or under your arm. erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible serious injury or death in an accident, NOTE
especially due to a deploying front passen-
across your hips, not around your waist.
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
 For instructions on installing a child restraint
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a
4
your vehicle. tems” on page 4-14 for additional child restraint system using the seat belt” on
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious information. page 4-18.
injury or death during deployment of the  Any child who is too small to properly
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the wear a seat belt must be properly
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far restrained in an appropriate child
restraint system. seats with their backs against the upright
back as possible while maintaining a posi-
 Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing seatback. To reduce the risk of serious
tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, child safety seat and positioned in the rear injury or death during deployment of the
and safely operate the vehicle. seat. airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-  In the event of an accident, all seat belt as possible while maintaining a position
ger of serious injury or death from a assemblies, including retractors and that still enables you to fully apply the
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger attachment hardware, should be inspected pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
always wears the seat belt properly, by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors and safely operate the vehicle. The front
remains seated all the way back and dealer to determine whether replacement passenger seat should also be moved as
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as is necessary. far back as possible. Refer to “Supple-
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on
page 4-21 for additional information.
Seat belt instructions on page 4-21. Also refer to “To adjust the
N00406200460 seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
even when you are wearing your seat belt. uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
Never place any part of the seat belt you an emergency locking retractor.
are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions This system is designed to provide both com-
creates a risk of serious injury or death to fort and safety. It permits full extension and
your child in the event of an accident or automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
sudden stop.
mal vehicleInfooperation.
r
mati
onPr
ovi Ay: sensing device
dedb

Seat belts
4. The lap part of the belt must always be
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
take up any slack in the lap belt.
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding

WARNING the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
death in the event of an accident or sud-
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
locked securely in the buckle.
the upright position while the vehicle is in NOTE
motion.  With the exception of the seat belt for the
Seat belt performance during an accident
driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-
are reclined. The more a seatback is ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
seat belt is not properly positioned against installation function (see page 4-18).
the body during an accident, there is
When the ALR function has been activated,
increased risk you will slide under the belt
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
and receive serious injury or death. let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.
2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
webbing so that it easily pulls across your NOTE
body.  If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way.
Then, pull the belt
Infor
maout
t
ionslowly
Provi once
dedby: again.

Seat belts
WARNING NOTE
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and  If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-
is worn as low as possible across the hips, tened, the warning light and the tone will
not around the waist. Failure to follow this issue further warnings each time the vehicle
instruction will increase the risk of serious starts moving from a stop.
injury or death in the event of an accident.
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
4
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may Front passenger seat belt warn-
adversely affect seat belt performance.
ing light
N00418300237
5. To release the belt, press the button on the
buckle and allow the belt to retract. If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” The front passenger seat belt warning light is
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it position or the operation mode is put in ON located at shown in the illustration.
out and check for kinks or twists in the without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a
webbing. Then make sure it remains warning light will come on and a tone will
untwisted as it retracts. sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
you to fasten your seat belt.
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still
Driver’s seat belt unfastened, the warning light will blink and
reminder/warning light the tone will sound intermittently until the
N00418400384 seat belt is fastened.
A tone and warning light are used to remind
the driver to fasten the seat belt. WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
When the ignition switch is turned to the
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
is also seated and fastening a seat belt. ON, this indicator normally comes on and
Children should additionally be restrained goes off a few seconds later.
in a secure child restraint system. The light comes on when a person sits on the
front passenger seat but does not fasten the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Seat belt use during pregnancy

seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub- must be obtained. The extender may be used
sequently fastened. for either of the front seats.
WARNING
 When a child booster seat is used on the
4 front passenger seat, the front passenger
seat belt warning light will not come on, if
the seat belt is not fastened when the
booster seat is used. Confirm that the
child is wearing the seat belt properly.
 Do not install any accessory or sticker that
makes the light difficult to see.
WARNING
 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so
Adjustable seat belt shoulder that the shoulder belt is positioned across
WARNING
the center of your shoulder without touch-
anchor (front seats) ing your neck. The shoulder belt should  The extender should only be used if the
N00406300357 not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail- existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted. ure to follow this instruction can adversely who can use the standard seat belt should
To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A) affect seat belt performance and increase not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an
and slide the anchor to the desired position. the risk of serious injury or death in the extender can adversely affect seat belt
event of an accident. performance in an accident.
Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into
 Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when  When not required, the extender must be
position.
the vehicle is not in motion. removed and stowed.
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
position after adjusting it.
Seat belt use during preg-
Seat belt extender nancy
N00406800147
N00406700205
If your seat belt is not long enough, even Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
when fully extended, a seat belt extender nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
women are more likely to be seriously injured
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems

or killed in an accident if they do not wear the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
seat belts. webbing and increase seat belt performance. of the electronic parts of the system whenever
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
WARNING under the following conditions. These include
all of the items listed above and all related
wiring.
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women [Except for vehicles equipped with the 4
should always wear a seat belt. The lap F.A.S.T.-key]
portion of the seat belt should be worn The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
snug and low across the hips and below “START” position.
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
have any additional questions or concerns. The operation mode is in ON.
The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate

Seat belt pre-tensioner and The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes under the same conditions as the airbag con-
the following components: trol unit.
force limiter systems
N00417701723 When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each some smoke is released and a loud noise will
have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care
system and force limiter system. should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
as it may cause some temporary irritation to
people with respiratory problems.
Pre-tensioner system The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact, even
The driver and front passenger seat belts are if the seat belt is not being worn. The seat belt
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys- pre-tensioners may not activate in certain col-
tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side lisions, even though the vehicle may appear
collision, the pre-tensioner system operates 1- SRS warning light to be severely damaged. Such non-activation
simultaneously with the deployment of the 2- Front impact sensors does not mean that something is wrong with
front airbags, side airbags or curtain airbags. 3- Seat belt pre-tensioner the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather
The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within 4- Side impact sensors that the collision forces were not severe
the seat belt retractors (A). When activated, 5- Airbag control unit enough to activate the system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Child restraint systems

Child restraint systems specifically designed  Children older than 1 year of age and who
WARNING for infants and small children are offered by weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who
 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
several manufacturers. Choose only a child are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must
designed to work only once. After the seat
restraint system with a label certifying that it be in a forward-facing restraint used only
belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
they will not work again. They must complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety in the rear seat.
promptly be replaced and the entire seat Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds
4 belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac- (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should
turer’s statement of compliance on the box use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
and child restraint system itself. in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and-
SRS warning light The child restraint system should be appropri-
shoulder belt fits them properly.
N00408700137
ate for your child’s weight and height, and
This warning light tells you if there is a prob- should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. WARNING
lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat For detailed information, refer to the instruc-  All children must be seated in the rear
belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS tion manual accompanying the child restraint seat, and properly restrained.
warning light” on page 4-27. Accident statistics show that children of
system.
all sizes and ages are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
Force limiter system Guidelines for child restraint the front seat.
 Be sure to select a child restraint system
N00408900142
system selection that is appropriate not only for the child’s
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
limiter system will help reduce the force size and age but also for your vehicle.
All children should be properly restrained in Some child restraint systems may not fit
applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
a restraint device that offers the maximum your vehicle properly.
protection for their size and age.
Child restraint systems Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
N00407101753 requirements for child size and age that may
When transporting infants or small children vary from the recommendations listed below.
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
 Children less than 1 year old and who
system must always be used. This is required
weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST
by law in the U.S. and Canada.
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
MUST ONLYInbe for
maused
t
ionPr
oin
vi
dethe rear seat.
dby:

WARNING Airbag
 Any child who is too large to use a child
restraint system should ride in the rear
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt
properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
tioned over the shoulder and across the
chest, not across their neck, and with the 4
lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
not across their stomach. If necessary, a
booster seat should be used to help achieve
a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
a booster seat that is certified as comply- WARNING WARNING
ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys- passenger’s airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If one must be used in
tions. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys-
even when you are wearing your seat belt. close to the passenger’s airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
Never place any part of the seat belt you deployment of that airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious
are wearing around an infant or child. be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions child restraint systems or infant restraint
creates a risk of serious injury or death to systems must only be used in the rear seat.
your child in the event of an accident or
sudden stop.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING NOTE Installing a child restraint sys-

 It is important to use an approved rear-  Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower
facing infant restraint until the infant is try installing it in the rear seat to ensure
one year old (unless the infant outgrows proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt Anchors and Tethers for chil-
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it dren) system
neck and spine to develop enough to sup- may be difficult to securely install some
4 port the weight of their head in the event manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418800157
of an accident. If the child restraint system can be pulled

forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
 When installing a child restraint system,
follow the instructions provided by the cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
manufacturer and follow the directions in choose another manufacturer’s child restraint The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
this manual. Failure to do so can result in system. of your vehicle are equipped with lower
serious injury or death to your child in an Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
accident or sudden stop. vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
 After installation, push and pull the child you have, the child restraint system can be
restraint system back and forth, and side attached using one of the following 2 meth-
to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If ods:
the child restraint system is not installed • Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear
securely, it may cause injury to the child seat ONLY if the child restraint system is
or other occupants in the event of an acci- compatible with the LATCH system (See
dent or sudden stop. page 4-16).
 When not in use, keep your child restraint • Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-18).
system secured with the seat belt, or
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.
Tether anchor locations

N00418900190
Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the

back of the rear seatbacks. These are for
securing a child restraint system tether strap
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your 3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
Examples of child restraint sys-
vehicle. child restraint system into the lower
tems compatible with the LATCH anchors (C) in accordance with the
system instructions provided by the child restraint
N00419000202 system manufacturer.
Remember, the lower anchors provided
with your vehicle are designed to secure 4
suitable child restraint systems compat-
ible with the LATCH system in the out-
board positions of the rear seats only.
The anchor connectors are NOT
designed to secure a suitable child
restraint system in the center position
of the rear seat.
NOTE
 The attachments points are behind slits on A- Rear-facing child restraint system
the seatback backboard cloth. B- Front-facing child restraint system
C- Child restraint system lower anchor
connectors
D- Tether strap
(These are only examples.)
Using the LATCH system

N00419100232
A- Vehicle seat cushion
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, B- Vehicle seatback
remove the head restraint from the loca- C- Lower anchor
tion where you wish to install the child D- Connector
restraint system.
2. Open the gap a little between the seat
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with
your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


5. Open the slit on the backboard cloth of the
NOTE seatback, latch the tether strap hook (E) of
Installing a child restraint sys-
 In order to secure a child restraint system
the child restraint system to the tether tem using the seat belt (with
compatible with the LATCH system, you
must use the lower anchor points in the out-
anchor bar (F) and tighten the tether strap emergency/automatic locking
board positions of the rear seat. To secure a so it is securely fastened. mechanism)
child restraint system in the center position
4 of the rear seat, you must use the vehicle’s
N00407300455
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt

center seat belt.
in all other seating positions can be converted
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor
(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull
 If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the
before installing the child restraint sys- retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away installation function. Always use the ALR
from, not looped through or otherwise child restraint installation function when you
interfering with, the child restraint sys- install a child restraint system using the seat
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in
tem. If foreign matter is not removed belt.
and/or the seat belt interferes with the all directions to ensure it is firmly
child restraint system, the child restraint secured. Children 12 years old and under should
system will not be secured properly, could always be restrained in the rear seat, when-
detach and move forward in the event of WARNING ever possible, although the front passenger
sudden braking or an accident, and could  Child restraint system tether anchors are seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
result in injury to the child or other vehi- designed only to withstand loads from cor-
cle occupants. rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust no circumstances are they to be used for
the seat where the child restraint system is adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
installed. ing other items or equipment to the vehi-
cle.
4. On a vehicle equipped with a rear shelf
panel, remove the rear shelf panel from
the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear shelf panel”
on page 5-109.)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


If the belt is in the ALR function, you will
WARNING not be able to pull it out. If the webbing
 When you install a child restraint system
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
using the seat belt, always make sure the
function has not been activated and you
retractor has been switched to the ALR
child restraint installation function. The will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.
ALR function will keep the child restraint 5. After confirming that the belt is locked,
system tightly secured to the seat. grab the shoulder part of the belt near the 4
Failure to convert the retractor to the buckle and pull up to remove any slack
ALR function may allow the child from the lap part of the belt allowing the
restraint system to move forward during slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,
sudden braking or an accident, resulting if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child
in serious injury or death to the child or restraint system will not be secure. It may
3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
other occupants.
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder help to put your weight on the child
part of the belt all the way out of the restraint system and/or push on its seat-
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt back while pulling up on the belt (See
Installation illustration).
feed back into the retractor.
1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
where you wish to install it.
To help assure proper fitting of the child
restraint system, always remove the head
restraint.
2. Route the seat belt through the child
restraint system according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle. 4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If your child restraint system requires the use
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in
accordance with the following procedures.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

6. On a vehicle equipped with a rear shelf 8. Before putting your child in the restraint, Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
panel, remove the rear shelf panel from push and pull the restraint in all directions tions.
the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear shelf panel” to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
on page 5-109.) before each use. If the child restraint sys- WARNING
7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1  Any child who is too small to properly
child restraint system to the tether anchor through 7.
4 bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is 9. To remove a child restraint system from
wear a seat belt must be properly
restrained in an appropriate child
securely fastened. the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, restraint system, to reduce their risk of
remove the child from the restraint. serious injury or death in an accident.
Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt  A child should never be left unattended in,
from the restraint and let the belt fully or unsupervised around, your vehicle.
retract. When you leave the vehicle, always take
10. Reinstall the head restraint. the child out as well.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.  Children can die from heat stroke if left or
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on
hot days.
Children who have outgrown  Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.
child restraint systems Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-
N00407601631
dren.
Children who have outgrown a child restraint

WARNING system should be seated in the rear seat and
 Child restraint system tether anchors are wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses Maintenance and inspection
designed only to withstand loads from cor- their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses of seat belts
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under their stomach, a commercially available N00407000364
no circumstances are they to be used for
booster seat must be used to raise the child so The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehi-
that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an
cle. and the lap belt remains positioned low organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the
across their hips. The booster seat should fit shade. Do not allow them to retract until com-
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re-
compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle dye the belts. The color may rub off and the
Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint webbing strength may be affected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Regularly check your seat belt buckles and The SRS front airbags are designed to supple- all types of accidents, seat belts must
their release mechanisms for positive engage- ment the primary protection of the driver and ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the front passenger seat belt systems by provid- rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
retractors for automatic locking when in the ing those occupants with protection against children in an appropriate child restraint sys-
Automatic Locking Retractor function. head and chest injuries in certain moderate to tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-
severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air- led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint
The entire seat belt assembly should be bags, together with sensors at the front of the systems” on page 4-14. 4
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious vehicle and sensors attached to the front
cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- seats, form an advanced airbag system.
tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
WARNING
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS
severe fading from sunlight. All of these con- The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY
ditions indicate a weakening of the belt, supplement the primary protection of the
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
which may adversely affect seat belt perfor- driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
mance in an accident. forward movement of the driver’s lower legs sengers properly positioned. This
and provide increased overall body protection reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
WARNING in certain moderate to severe frontal colli- and reduces the risk of serious injuries or
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any
sions. death when the airbags inflate.
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work During sudden braking just before a col-
The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags lision, an unrestrained or improperly
should be done by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have are also designed to supplement the seat belts. restrained driver or passengers can move
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer The SRS side airbags provide the driver and forward into direct contact with, or
perform the work could reduce the effec- front passenger with protection against chest within close proximity to, the airbag
tiveness of the belts and could result in a injuries by deploying the bag on the side when it begins to inflate.
serious injury or death in an accident. impacted in moderate to severe side impact The beginning stage of airbag inflation is
the most forceful and can cause serious
collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
injuries or death if the occupant comes in
the driver and passengers on the front seat contact with the airbag at this time.
Supplemental Restraint Sys- and rear outboard seat with protection against • Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in
head injuries by deploying a bag on the side
tem (SRS) - airbag impacted in moderate to severe side impact
rollovers, in rear impact collisions, and
in lower-speed frontal collisions because
N00407701791
collisions. the airbags are not designed to inflate in
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental those situations.
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use
bags for the driver and passengers. of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING WARNING WARNING

• Seat belts reduce the risk of being • Seat all infants and children in the rear  Infants and small children should never
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or seat, properly restrained in an appropri- ride unrestrained, or lean against the
rollover. ate child restraint system. instrument panel. They should never ride
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-  Airbags inflate very quickly and with held in your arms or on your lap. They
can be seriously injured or killed in an
4 ERLY SEATED.
• A driver or front passenger sitting too
great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or sit with your lower legs too close to accident, especially when the airbags
close to the steering wheel or instrument the instrument panel, or lean your head or inflate. Seat all infants and children in the
panel during airbag deployment can be chest close to the steering wheel or the rear seat, properly restrained in an appro-
seriously injured or killed. instrument panel. priate child restraint system. Refer to
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with  Do not put your feet or legs on or against “Child restraint systems” on page 4-14.
great force. If the driver and front pas- the instrument panel.
senger are not properly seated and
restrained, the airbag may not provide
the proper protection, and can cause
serious injuries or death when it inflates.
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death due to a deploying
driver’s airbag, always properly wear
your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
as far back as possible, maintaining a
position that still allows the driver to
have good control of the steering wheel,
brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
trols.
• To reduce the risk to the front passenger
of serious injury or death from a deploy-
ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
passenger always wears the seat belt
properly, remains seated upright and all
the way back in the seat, and positions
the seat as far back as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING WARNING How the Supplemental

 NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT Restraint System works
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat N00407800522
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
The SRS includes the following components:
senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
close to the passenger’s airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
deployment of that airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys- 4
be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
in the rear seat.
Airbag
1- Curtain airbag modules

2- Airbag module (Driver)
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator
4- SRS warning light
5- Airbag module (Passenger)
6- Front impact sensors
7- Side airbag modules
WARNING 8- Driver’s seat position sensor
 Older children should be seated in the 9- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica-
rear seat with their seat belt properly tion sensor system
worn, and with an appropriate booster
10- Side impact sensors
seat if needed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
11- Airbag module (Driver’s knee)
child restraint systems” on page 4-20. 12- Airbag control unit
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: of the electronic parts of the system whenever


the ignition switch or the operation mode is These data can help provide a better under-
under the following conditions. These include
CAUTION standing of the circumstances in which
 Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
all of the items listed above and all related crashes and injuries occur.
force. In certain situations, contact with an
wiring.
inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the sions, and bruises. NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key]
4 The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
“START” position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
Event Data Recording are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
N00418600256
The operation mode is in ON. name, gender, age, and crash location) are
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorded. However, other parties, such as
The airbags will operate under the same con- recorder (EDR). law enforcement, could combine the EDR
ditions as the airbag control unit. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in data with the type of personally identifying
certain crash or near crash-like situations, data routinely acquired during a crash inves-
When the impact sensors detect a sufficient such as an airbag deployment or hitting a tigation.
front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s), road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed. standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. To read data recorded by an EDR, special
The EDR is designed to record data related to equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
less. law enforcement, that have the special equip-
the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
ment, can read the information if they have
tion to people with respiratory problems. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record access to the vehicle or the EDR.
such data as:
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
may not even notice that the airbag was  How various systems in your vehicle were Driver’s seat position sensor
inflated. operating; N00417900223
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver  Whether or not the driver and front pas- The driver’s seat position sensor is attached
from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, senger safety belts were buckled/fastened; to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
and does not prevent people from leaving the  How far (if at all) the driver was depress- unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft
vehicle. ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; position. The airbag control unit controls
and, deployment of the driver’s front airbag in
 How fast the vehicle was traveling.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


accordance with the information it receives
from this sensor.
Passenger’s seat occupant clas- WARNING
If there is a problem involving the driver’s sification sensor system • The SRS warning light does not initially
come on when the ignition switch or the
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in N00418000364
operation mode is under the following
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to The passenger’s seat occupant classification conditions.
“SRS warning light” on page 4-27. sensor system is attached to the front passen-
ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-
• [Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
4
WARNING trol unit with information regarding the The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
 If the SRS warning light comes on, have occupant on the front passenger seat. The air- “START” position.
the vehicle inspected by an authorized bag control unit controls deployment of the [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi- passenger’s front airbag in accordance with The operation mode is in ON.
ble. the information it receives from this system. • The SRS warning light does not go out
 Please observe the following instructions The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy after several seconds.
to ensure that the driver’s seat position in an impact when the system senses no occu- • The SRS warning light comes on while
sensor can operate correctly. you are driving.
pant on the front passenger seat or a child in a
• Adjust the seat to the correct position,  To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-
child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
and sit well back against the seatback. pant classification sensor system can sense
senger’s airbag off indicator will illuminate.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3. correctly, observe the following instruc-
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on tions. Failure to follow these instructions
• Do not recline the seatback more than page 4-26.
necessary when driving. can adversely affect the performance of
If there is a problem involving the passen- the passenger’s airbag system.
• Do not place metallic objects or luggage
ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys- • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
under the front seat.
tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument and sit well back against the seatback.
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe
impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by
panel will come on. Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as Refer to “SRS warning light” page 4-27. • Do not recline the seatback more than
soon as possible. necessary.
• Never have more than one person (adult
WARNING or child) sitting on the seat.
 If any of the following conditions occur,
• Do not place anything between the seat
you should immediately have your vehicle
and the floor console.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
• When attaching a child restraint system,
Motors dealer as soon as possible:
secure it firmly.
• Do not place luggage or other objects on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: the seat.

WARNING WARNING
• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.  If any of the following conditions occur,
• Do not modify or replace the seat and you should immediately have the airbag
seat belt. system in your vehicle inspected by an
• Do not place luggage or other objects authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible:
4 under the seat.
• Do not place and use an electronic device • The passenger’s airbag off indicator
such as a computer on the seat. comes on when an adult is sitting on the
• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or front passenger seat.
stick pins, needles, or other objects into • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
it. not come on when the front passenger
• Do not remove the seat cushion skin. The indicator normally comes on when the seat is not occupied.
• If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
and dry the seat immediately. not come on when the ignition switch is
or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
turned to the “ON” position or the oper-
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
ation mode is put in ON.
impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as • The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
the passenger front airbag is not operational. not come on when a child is in a child
soon as possible.
restraint system on the front passenger
 The front passenger seat is not occupied. seat.
Passenger’s airbag off indicator  The system senses that a child is using a • The passenger’s airbag off indicator
N00418101359
child restraint system on the front passen- comes on and goes out repeatedly.
ger seat.  Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
located at shown in the illustration. cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi- indicator difficult or impossible to see.
cation sensor system senses there is a person You must be able to see the passenger’s
seated in the front passenger seat, the indica- airbag off indicator and verify the status
tor goes out to show that the passenger’s front of the passenger’s airbag system.
airbag is operational.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
SRS warning light WARNING passenger seat is not occupied or when the
N00408300579  If any of the following conditions occur,
system senses that a child is in the child
There is a Supplemental Restraint System there may be a problem with the SRS air-
restraint system.
bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
(SRS) warning light on the instrument panel.
they may not function properly in a colli-
sion or may suddenly activate without a
collision: 4
• Even when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
ing light does not come on or it remains
on.
• The SRS warning light comes on while Driver
driving.
The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten- Front passenger
sioners are designed to help reduce the
risk of serious injury or death in certain
collisions. If either of the above conditions
The system checks itself every time the igni- occurs, immediately have your vehicle
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Driver’s knee airbag system
Motors dealer. N00404500036
the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
warning light will come on for several sec- The driver’s knee airbag is located under the
onds and then go out. This is normal and steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
means the system is working properly. Driver’s and passenger’s front designed to deploy at the same time as the
If there is a problem involving one or more of airbag system driver’s front airbag.
the SRS components, the warning light will N00407900321
come on and stay on. The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
The SRS warning light is shared by the SRS ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system. The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Deployment of front airbags

N00408000606
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY object
condition is shown in the illustration to the when …

left.
In certain types of front collisions, the front
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not 4
designed to deploy only in certain moderate deploy, even if the deformation of the body Collision where the vehicle slides under the
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body rear body of a truck
area between the arrows in the illustration to structure is designed to absorb the impact and
the right. deform in order to help protect the occupants.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag Some typical situations where the front air-
will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
structure is above a specific threshold level. are shown in the illustrations.
The threshold level is approximately 15 mph Oblique frontal impact
(25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If bag do not protect the occupant in all types of
the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your
below this threshold level, the front airbags seat belts properly.
and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,
another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
rail). The front airbags and driver’s
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the knee airbag ARE NOT
most forceful, and can cause serious injury or DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
death if you are too close to the deploying air- …
bag. Accordingly, it is important that you
always wear the available seat belt. The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
not designed to deploy in situations where
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or
pants.
Some typical situations are shown in the knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb
illustration. …
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air- The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
4 bag do not protect the occupants in all types may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
of collisions, be sure to always wear the your suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
seat belts properly. carriage impact). Some typical situations are
shown in the illustration.
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
bag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,
and these unexpected impacts can move you Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the
ground
out of position, it is important to always wear
Side collision to your vehicle
your seat belts properly. When worn properly,
seat belts can help maintain your distance
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful and can cause serious injury or
death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

WARNING
 Do not attach anything to the steering
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Side airbag system

N00408100421
The side airbags (A) are contained in the

driver and front passenger seatbacks.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even 4
with no passenger in the front seat.
WARNING WARNING
 Do not attach accessories to, or put them  Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
in front of, the windshield. They could semble or repair the SRS airbags.
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and  Do not place objects, such as packages or
injure an occupant, when the airbag pets, between the airbags and the driver
inflates. or the front passenger. Such objects can
 Do not attach additional keys or accesso- adversely affect airbag performance, or
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the cause serious injury or death when the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent airbag deploys. A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
the driver’s knee airbag from inflating  Immediately after airbag inflation, some cles equipped with side airbags.
normally or could be propelled to cause parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
serious injury if the airbag inflates. not touch them. You could otherwise be
 Do not attach accessories to the lower por- burned.
tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.  The airbag system is designed to work
Such objects could prevent the driver’s only once. After the airbags deploy, they
knee airbag from inflating normally or will not work again. They must promptly
could be propelled to cause serious injury be replaced and the entire airbag system
if the airbag inflates. must be inspected by an authorized
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Curtain airbag system WARNING

N00419200217  Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
The curtain airbags are contained in the front other object around the part where the
pillars and roof side rail. curtain airbag deploys, such as on the
The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only windshield, side door glass or front and
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
4 on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or
even with no passenger in the seat.
other object may be hurled with great
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate
correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back
of either front seat. Special care should be
taken with children.
 Do not place any objects around the area
where the side airbags deploy. Such
objects can interfere with proper side air-
WARNING bag deployment, and cause injury during
 The side airbags and curtain airbags can deployment of the side airbag.
cause serious injury or death to anyone  Do not place stickers, labels or additional
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To trim on the back of either front seat. They
reduce the risk of injury from a deploying can interfere with proper side airbag WARNING
side airbag and curtain airbag, all occu- deployment.  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats
pants must be properly restrained and that have side airbags. Covers can inter-
seated well back, upright, and in the mid- fere with proper side airbag deployment
dle of the seat. Do not lean against the and adversely affect side airbag perfor-
door. mance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


occupants, be sure to always wear your seat
WARNING Deployment of side airbag and belts properly.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint curtain airbag
system in the front passenger seat. Rear- N00408200536
facing child restraint systems MUST The side airbag and curtain airbag
ONLY be used in the rear seat.
The side airbag and curtain airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
 Front-facing child restraint systems
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY 4
In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
If a front-facing child restraint system when... bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
must be used in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible, and if the deformation of the body seems to be
make sure that the child stays in the child The side airbag and curtain airbag are large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
restraint system, properly restrained and designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a designed to absorb the impact and to deform
away from the door. moderate to severe side impact to the middle in order to help protect the occupants. Some
 Do not allow a child to lean against or sit of the passenger compartment. typical situations where the side airbags and
close to the passenger door, even if the A typical situation is shown in the illustra- curtain airbags may not deploy are shown in
child is seated in a child restraint system. tion. the illustrations on the following page.
The child’s head should also not lean
against or be close to the section of the Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do
seatback where the side airbag and cur- Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the
vehicle body’s side structure not protect the occupant in all types of side
tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
belts properly.
Failure to follow all of these instructions
could lead to serious injury or death to the
child.
 Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
airbag or curtain airbag components
should be done only by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk
of a serious injury or death. Improper
work methods can cause accidental side The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or mary means of protection in an accident. The
render a side airbag or curtain airbag
SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are
inoperable. Either of these situations
designed to provide additional protection.
could result in serious injury or death.
Therefore, forInfoyour
r
mat
ionsafety
Pr
ovi and
dedby: the safety of all

Side impact in an area away from the passenger Oblique side impact Head-on collision
compartment
4
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-
sion with the side of vehicle Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow

object
The side airbag and curtain airbag
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
DEPLOY when...
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not

designed to deploy in situations where they
cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Some typical situations are shown in the
illustration.
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

not protect the occupant in all types of colli-
sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts
properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

SRS servicing WARNING NOTE

N00408501725  Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel
WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
 Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
Also, if you discover any tear or open
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi seam in the seat fabric near the side air-
To contact Mitsubishi Motors 4
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-
North America, Inc.
to do any service, inspection, maintenance rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
or repair on any SRS components or wir-  If you have found any scratch, crack or Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should damage to the portion of the front and
ica, Inc.
ever be handled, removed or disposed by rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi have the SRS inspected by an authorized Customer Relations Depart-
Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer. ment
Improper work methods on the SRS com- P.O. Box 6400
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
tions could result in serious injury or to another person, we urge you to alert the [For vehicles sold in Canada]
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any
other SRS component or related vehicle
and refer that owner to the applicable sec- of Canada, Inc.
tions in this owner’s manual.
part. For example, replacement of the call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
 If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can ada, Inc.
adversely affect SRS performance and be made safe for disposal.
may lead to injury. Customer Relations Depart-
 If any of the following parts needs to be
 If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person,
ment
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly P.O. Box 41009
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
make sure it is in proper working order.
affected. Please consult an authorized 4141 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat
I
nfbelt
or
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


[For vehicles sold in Puerto [For vehicles sold in American Warning label
Rico] Samoa] N00408600383
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
of Caribbean, Inc. call 684 (699) 9140 or write to: are located in the vehicle as shown in the
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc. illustration.
4 Mitsubishi Motor Sales of P.O. Box 698
Caribbean, Inc. PAGO PAGO,
Customer Service Department AMERICAN SAMOA AS,
P.O. Box 192216 96799
SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
[For vehicles sold in Guam]

To contact Triple J Enterprises
Inc.
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
P.O. Box 6066
TAMUNING
GUAM 96931
[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors
call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Triple J Motors
* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2 Rear-view camera (if so equipped).................................................5-60

Keys .................................................................................................5-2 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-62
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-3 Multi-information display .............................................................5-62 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6 Indicator and warning light package .............................................5-70
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Indicators .......................................................................................5-71
(if so equipped) ............................................................................5-9 Warning lights ................................................................................5-72
Door locks ......................................................................................5-24 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-74
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-26 Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-76
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-27 Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-77
Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-27 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..........................................5-77
Manual window control (if so equipped)........................................5-28 Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-78
Power window control ...................................................................5-29 Electric rear window defogger switch ...........................................5-80
Parking brake .................................................................................5-31 Horn switch ...................................................................................5-81
Steering wheel height adjustment ..................................................5-32 Link System (if so equipped) .........................................................5-81
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-32 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).......................................5-81
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-33 USB input terminal (if so equipped) ...........................................5-101
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-35 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-105
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-36 12 V power outlets .......................................................................5-106
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-38 Interior lights ...............................................................................5-106
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-39 Storage spaces ..............................................................................5-107
Service brake .................................................................................5-44 Cup holders ..................................................................................5-108
Hill start assist (if so equipped) ......................................................5-45 Bottle holders ...............................................................................5-108
Brake assist system ........................................................................5-46 Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)..................................................5-109
Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-46 Convenience hook .......................................................................5-109
Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-48 Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-110
Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-49
Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-52 Informati
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) ..........................5-56

Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508700330 N00508800621
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
5 mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
observing the following precautions during

the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and
the break-in period. keyless entry system
2- Key number plate
 Avoid revving the engine.
 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,
sudden acceleration, prolonged high- Type 3
speed driving and sudden braking. These
would have a detrimental effect on the Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys
engine and also cause increased fuel and are provided.
oil consumption, which could result in 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
malfunction of the engine components. Be 2- Key number plate
key in a safe place together as a set of spare
particularly careful to avoid full accelera- keys.
tion while in low shift position (low
gears). Type 2
 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within
the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
precautions” on page 6-10.) Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2 Features and controls

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
NOTE NOTE
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
netism, such as audio systems, computers tional status, the alarm operates if a door or
and televisions. liftgate is opened after using the key, the
• Keep away from devices that emit strong door lock knob or the power door lock
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular switch to unlock the vehicle.
phones, wireless devices and high fre-  The system does not enter the preparation
quency equipment (including medical
devices).
status if the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-
5
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. cle.
• Do not leave the key where it may be
1- F.A.S.T.-key
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
(with electronic immobilizer and key- ity.
Electronic immobilizer
less entry system function)  If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of (Anti-theft starting system)
2- Emergency key the vehicle immediately contact an autho- N00509100780
3- Key number plate rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer of the key number, they can Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
NOTE make a new key. The key number is stamped key)]
 The keyless entry key and F.A.S.T.-key are a on the key number plate. Keep the key num- For information on operations for vehicles
precision electronic device with a built-in ber plate in a safe place separate from the equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
signal transmitter. Please observe the follow- key itself. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
ing in order to prevent damage.  No keys other than those registered in “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to advance can be used to start the engine. (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft theft starting system)” on page 5-20.
top of the dashboard. starting system)” on page 5-3.
• Do not take the remote control transmitter Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
apart. Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic hand Advanced Security Transmitter
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on (F.A.S.T.-key)]
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject
page 5-20.
it to strong impacts. The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry. nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
• Keep away from magnetic objects such as theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
key rings. bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Features and controls 5-3


attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
NOTE
 A system failure is suspected when the igni-
a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi-
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
electronics. Motors dealer.
5 NOTE
 In the following cases, the vehicle may not CAUTION
be able to recognize the registered ID code  Do not make any alterations or additions to
from the key. This means the engine will not the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi-
start even when the key is turned to the tions could cause failure of the immobilizer.
“START” position.
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object (Type A) Replacement keys
• When the key grip contacts metal of
another key (Type B)
• When the key contacts or is close to other
Only keys that have been programmed to the
immobilizer keys (including keys of other vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
vehicles) (Type C) vehicle.
 In cases like the above, move the offending
object(s) away from the key and turn the key If you lose the key, you can order a key from
back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
try to start the engine again. If the engine NOTE referring to the key number.
does not start, contact an authorized To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
 The key may not operate properly when it is
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. near an object or facility that emits strong vehicle keys must be changed.
electromagnetic waves. Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
 Electronic immobilizer is not compatible your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
with commercially available remote starting have your ID code changed.
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors
Additional keys dealer) by doing the following:
NOTE
 When the key registration is completed, the
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis- 1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition immobilizer indicator will come on within
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi- 30 seconds of turning the ignition switch to
tered keys. You need to register the ID code
the “ON” position with the blank immobi-
to the vehicle. tion for 5 seconds.
lizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at
Registering the ID code can be done by your- 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and your Mitsubishi Motors dealer).
self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or remove the first key.
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first 5
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- key, insert the second valid key into the 5. If you wish to register another key, per-
low the “Customer key programming” proce- ignition and turn it to the “ON” position. form the process again from step 1.
dure below. About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer
If you choose to have your authorized indicator will start to blink. NOTE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID 4. When the immobilizer indicator starts  It is not possible to register a key if:
code, take your vehicle and all remaining blinking, turn the second valid key to the • the immobilizer indicator goes off during
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors “OFF” position and remove it. Within 30 the procedure
dealer. seconds after doing so, insert a blank • the immobilizer indicator does not come on
immobilizer key into the ignition switch within 30 seconds after step 4.
NOTE and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform  The procedure will be terminated automati-
this operation no more than 30 seconds cally if:
 You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
after the immobilizer indicator starts • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
register up to 8 keys.
blinking. When registration of the ID from the moment when the first key is
code is complete, the immobilizer indica- turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
when the second key is turned to the “ON”
tor will come on for 3 seconds then go off.
Customer key programming If an error occurs, the immobilizer indica-
position
(Except for vehicles sold in tor will go off during the procedure.
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
from the moment when the second key is
Canada) turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
N00562200139 when the blank immobilizer key is turned
You can program new keys to the system if to the “ON” position
you have two valid (already registered) keys • more than 20 seconds elapses after the
and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for immobilizer indicator starts blinking
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

General information Keyless entry system (if so NOTE

N00562300097  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
equipped)
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a horn will sound once.
N00509000923
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Press the remote control transmitter buttons
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate. To unlock
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This It can also help you signal for attention by
5 device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules setting off the panic alarm. Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS driver’s door only.
standard(s). Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
Operation is subject to the following two con- button one more time to unlock all the doors
ditions. and liftgate.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
 This device may not cause harmful inter- The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
ference.
 This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may NOTE
cause undesired operation of this device.  The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.
WARNING 1- LOCK ( ) button Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock
 Changes or modifications not expressly function” on page 5-7.
approved by the party responsible for
2- UNLOCK ( ) button
compliance could void the user’s authority 3- PANIC button
to operate the equipment. 4- Indicator light Answerback function
The horn of the keyless entry system answer-

To lock back function can be changed as required.
This is done with the key removed from the
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the ignition switch.
doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will also blink once.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
NOTE Turn signal lights deactiva-
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
 The answerback function will not operate if tion/reactivation during this time.
any of the doors are open.
4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
The turn signal lights answerback function UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
can be changed. pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
Horn deactivation/reactivation If you want to change the answerback func-
tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
The answerback function can be set in the Motors dealer.
Using the panic alarm 5
N00543700034
following three ways.
Each time the answerback function is set, a If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
Setting of door and liftgate ened, you may acti-vate the alarm to call
the answerback function. unlock function attention as follows:
N00543600118
One chime: The horn will not sound. The door and liftgate unlock function can be 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
Two chimes: The horn will sound. set to the following two conditions. 1 second.
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the Each time the door and liftgate unlock func- 2. The headlights will blink on and off and
LOCK button is pressed twice tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the the horn will sound intermittently for
within 1 second. condition of the door and liftgate unlock about 3 minutes.
function. 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
the remote control transmitter.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Number of
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- Condition
chimes Replacement remote control
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
the “OFF” position. One chime
All doors and the liftgate transmitters
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- unlock N00543800051
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only Only remote control transmitters pro-
during this time. grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and 1. Put the operation mode in OFF. lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate.
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. If you lose the remote control transmitter, you
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
can order a remote control transmitter from
the “OFF” position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
referring to the key number. complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
remote control transmitter must be changed. dard(s).
Take your vehicle and all remote control Operation is subject to the following two con-
transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi ditions.
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed.
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
5 ference.
Additional remote control  This device must accept any interference
transmitters received, including interference that may
N00543900078 cause undesired operation of this device.
To add a remote control transmitter, you must NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
already have 1 registered remote control WARNING Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
transmitter.  Changes or modifications not expressly
Registering the ID code can be done by your Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
approved by the party responsible for open the remote control transmitter case, the
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. compliance could void the user’s authority buttons may come out.
Take your vehicle and any remaining keys to to operate the equipment.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
3. Remove the remote control transmitter
from the remote control transmitter case.
NOTE Procedure for replacing the Then, open the remote control transmitter
 You are provided with 2 remote control remote control transmitter bat- using the method described in step 2.
transmitters, but you may register up to 4
remote control transmitters.
tery
N00544100080
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a
General information metal grounded object.
N00546100114
2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
frequency subject to Federal Communica- screwdriver into the notch in the remote
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles control transmitter case and use it to open
sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules the case. Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that system” on page 5-21.
it works.
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
NOTE
vehicle operations such as locking and
 You may purchase a replacement battery at
unlocking the doors and the liftgate,
an electric appliance store.
starting the engine, and changing the
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
operation mode. When leaving the vehi-
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
cle, make sure you are carrying the
5
F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle.
CAUTION
4. Remove the old battery.  When the remote control transmitter case is
5. Install a new battery with the + side (A) opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
WARNING
down. out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-  Individuals who use implantable pace-
nents. makers or implantable cardiovascular-
defibrillators should keep away from the
+ side external and internal transmitters. The
electromagnetic waves used in the
Free-hand Advanced Secu- F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- implantable pacemakers and implantable
cardiovascular-defibrillators.
- side
key) (if so equipped)
N00503101134
Coin type battery

CR1620 The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the
liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine
6. Close the remote control transmitter
to be started and the operation mode to be
firmly.
changed simply by carrying it.
7. Place the remote control transmitter in the
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
remote control transmitter case, then
remote control transmitter of the keyless
securely close the remote control trans-
entry system.
mitter case.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter In(F.A.S.T.-key):
f
ormat
ionPr dedby: Keyless
ovi entry

The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
key can be modified as stated below.
NOTE
Use the emergency key in such circum-
(Keyless entry operations are possible.)
stances.
For details, contact an authorized
Refer to “To operate without using the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-19.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
of the doors and the liftgate reception operations in its communication
• Enabling only the starting of the engine
5 • Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 2 years, depending on the
NOTE usage conditions.
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-
waves. ing reception operations, the reception of
In cases such as the following, operation strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
A- External transmitter may be improper or unstable. the running down of the battery. Do not place
B- Internal transmitter • The vehicle is near a facility that emits near to electrical appliances such as televi-
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV sions or computers.
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
WARNING station or an airport
 Individuals using other electro-medical • The key is carried together with other com- Operating range of the
apparatus besides implantable pacemak- munication devices such as cellular phones F.A.S.T.-key
ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi- or radios, or electrical appliances such as N00503200167
brillators should check with the computers
• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
When a person enters the operating range of
manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm
the effect of the electromagnetic waves metal object the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-
used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag- • A keyless entry system is being used key and presses the driver’s door lock/unlock
netic waves may affect the operations of nearby switch the liftgate switch, verification of the
the electro-medical apparatus. • The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down ID code is performed.
• The vehicle is in a location with strong The doors and the liftgate can only be locked
electromagnetic waves or noise and unlocked, the engine can only be started
and the operation mode can only be changed
when the ID codes of the vehicle and
F.A.S.T.-key match.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Operating range for starting the

engine and changing the opera-
tion mode
N00503300070
The operating range is the interior of the

vehicle.
5
*: Front of the vehicle

NOTE : Operating range
 When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
down or there are strong electromagnetic
waves or noise in the area, the operating NOTE
range could decrease or operations could  Only the doors and the liftgate that detect the
become unstable. F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked.
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-
key is too close to the windshield, door win- *: Front of the vehicle
Operating range for locking and dows or liftgate. : Operating range
unlocking the doors and the lift-  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3
feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door switch or
gate the tailgate switch, the system may not oper- NOTE
ate if the key is close to the ground or in a  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
The operating range is within about 2.3 feet high position.
ing range, it may not be possible to start the
(70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlock  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating engine and change the operation mode if the
switch and the liftgate switch. range, even a person not carrying the key is in a storage space such as the glove
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
or the liftgate by pressing the driver’s door or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
switch or the tailgate switch. ment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE Driver’s door To unlock

 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
it may not be possible to start the engine and While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the
change the operation mode if the key is too operating range, you can unlock the doors
close to a door or door window. and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.- The turn signal lights will blink twice and the
5 key buzzer will sound twice.
N00503400228
Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door
locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-24, 5-26 and
To lock 5-27 respectively.
Liftgate
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the Press the driver’s door switch (A) to unlock
driver’s door switch (A), or the liftgate switch only the driver’s door.
(B) within the operating range to lock all the Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s
doors and the liftgate. door switch one more time to unlock all the
The turn signal lights will blink once and the doors and the liftgate.
buzzer will sound once.
Driver’s switch
Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door
locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-24, 5-26 and
5-27 respectively.
NOTE
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
key does not operate.
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger
compartment
• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar
• The operation mode is not in OFF.
 The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi
InfMotors
or
mati
onPr dealer
ovi for details.
dedby:

NOTE NOTE
 Settings can be changed so that all doors and  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
the liftgate are unlocked automatically by key does not operate.
pressing the driver’s door switch once. • A door or the liftgate is open or ajar
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer • The operation mode is not in OFF.
for details.  Functions settings can be modified as stated
below.
Press the liftgate switch (B) to unlock all the See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer 5
for details.
doors and the liftgate.
• Activating the operation confirmation func-
tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only
Liftgate switch during locking, or only during unlocking.
• Deactivating the operation confirmation CAUTION
function (blinking of the turn signal lights)  The indicator light (A) will flash orange
and buzzer. when there is a problem or malfunction in
• Modifying the number of blinks in the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter.
operation confirmation function (blinking Never drive if the indicator light on the
of the turn signal lights). engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-
• Making the buzzer sound when the ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger Motors dealer.
compartment when all the doors and the  If the engine switch operation is not smooth
liftgate are closed. and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
switch.
NOTE Immediately contact an authorized
 If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked
Engine switch Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
N00513500088
using the driver’s door switch when all doors
and the liftgate are locked and no doors or To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys
the liftgate are opened within about 30 sec- other than those registered in advance can be NOTE
onds, the doors and the liftgate will automat- used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-  When operating the engine switch, press the
ically re-lock. lizer function) switch all the way in. If the switch is not
 The amount of time after unlocking until the While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
vehicle relocks automatically can be operation mode may not change. If the
switch can be used to start the engine.
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
Motors dealer for details. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: need to hold the engine switch down.

Operation mode of the engine NOTE CAUTION

switch and its function  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic  When the engine is not running, put the oper-
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the mode in ON or ACC for a long time when
OFF one registered to the immobilizer computer. the engine is not running may cause the bat-
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft tery to be discharged, making it impossible
The indicator light on the engine switch turns starting system)” on page 5-20) to start the engine.
off.
5 On vehicles equipped with continuously vari-
 When the battery is disconnected, the current
operation mode is memorized. After recon-
able transmission (CVT), the operation mode Changing the operation mode necting the battery, the memorized mode is
cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever N00568000025
selected automatically. Before disconnect-
is in any position other than the “P” (PARK) ing the battery for repair or replacement,
position. If you press the engine switch without press- make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
ing the brake pedal {continuously variable Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
ACC (manual transaxle) while the vehicle is sta- is run down.
Allows operation of some electrical accesso- tionary, you can change the operation mode  The operation mode cannot be changed from
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
ries.
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper-
The indicator light on the engine switch illu- ating range for starting the engine and
minates orange. changing the operation mode” on page 5-11.
ON
ACC power auto-cutout function
All electrical accessories can be used. N00568101049
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
minates green. When the vehicle is in ACC operation mode
The indicator light turns off when the engine for approximately 30 minutes, the ACC
is running. power auto-cutout function automatically
cuts power to the audio system and other
electronic devices that can be used during
ACC operation mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


To enable power after ACC power auto-cut- Put the operation mode in Refer to “Key lock-in preven-
out function, press the engine switch while in OFF and then start the engine tion system” on page 5-16.
ACC. again.
If the warning is not can- Refer to “Door ajar preven-
NOTE celled, there is a fault in the tion system” on page 5-16.
 It is possible to modify the functions as fol- electronic immobilizer (Anti-
lows: theft starting system). Refer to “Operation mode
OFF reminder system” on
• The time until the power cuts out can be Please contact an authorized
page 5-16. 5
changed to approximately 60 minutes. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can
be deactivated. If the following warnings show, the light goes F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring
For details, we recommend you to consult an off if the correct action is taken.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. system
 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the N00559801196
vehicle cannot be verified

Warning activation
N00503500216 Someone may be carrying a
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given F.A.S.T.-key with a different When the operation mode is in any mode
through buzzers and displayed symbols in ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key other than OFF, and a door is opened and the
order to prevent mistaken operations or vehi- may not be within the operat- F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
cle theft. ing range compartment the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-
When a warning operates, be sure to check Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take- key and the vehicle can no longer be verified.
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is out monitoring system” on When the door is closed, the warning light
also shown if there is a problem in the page 5-15. blinks and the buzzer sounds 4 times as a
F.A.S.T.-key. warning. If the vehicle starts, the inner buzzer
The battery of the F.A.S.T.- sounds once.
If the following warning shows, contact an key is run down
 A door or the liftgate cannot be locked
There is a problem in the even when the driver’s door switch or the
F.A.S.T.-key liftgate switch is pressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE Door ajar prevention system Starting and stopping the

 The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system N00560000159
engine
does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is N00514601357
removed through a window without opening
a door.
This setting can be changed. Tips for starting
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer When the operation mode is in OFF, and
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing  The operation mode can be in any mode
5 for details.
 The warning may display even if the the driver’s door switch or the liftgate switch to start the engine.
F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for while one of the doors or the liftgate is not  The starter motor will be turning for up to
starting the engine and changing the opera- fully closed, the warning light blinks and the approximately 15 seconds if the engine
tion mode. The surrounding environment or buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warn- switch is released at once. Pressing the
electromagnetic waves may make it impossi- ing, and the doors and the liftgate cannot be engine switch again while the starter
ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key locked. motor is still turning will stop the starter
and vehicle. motor. The starter motor will be turning
for up to approximately 30 seconds while
Operation mode OFF reminder the engine switch is pressed.
Key lock-in prevention system system If the engine does not start, wait for a
N00559900158 N00560100150
while and then attempt to start the engine
again. Trying repeatedly with the starter
motor still turning will damage the starter
mechanism.
When the operation mode is in OFF, the When the operation mode is in any mode  If the engine will not start because the bat-
F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart- other than OFF, all the doors and the liftgate tery is weak or discharged, refer to
ment, all the doors and the liftgate are closed, are closed, and someone tries to lock the “Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
and someone tries to lock the vehicle by vehicle by pressing the driver’s door switch for instructions.
pressing the driver’s door switch or the lift- or the liftgate switch, the warning light blinks  A longer warm up period will only con-
gate switch, the warning light blinks and the and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as sume extra fuel.
buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warn- a warning, and the doors and the liftgate can- The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
ing, and the doors and the liftgate cannot be not be locked. ing when the low coolant temperature
locked. indicator goes out.
Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: cator” on page 5-71.
WARNING NOTE NOTE

 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly  After the engine has not started for a while,  On vehicles equipped with continuously
ventilated area any longer than is needed the brake pedal effort needed to start the variable transmission (CVT), the engine can
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car- engine may become greater. If this occurs, only be started when the selector lever is in
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and depress the brake pedal more firmly than the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
extremely poisonous, could build up and usual. tion.
cause serious injury or death. For safety reasons, the engine should be
4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
started when the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels
5
down (manual transaxle).
CAUTION lock.
 Do not push-start the vehicle. NOTE
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive 6. Press the engine switch.
 For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-
at high speeds until the engine has had a 7. Confirm that all warning lights and warn-
axle, the engine will not start unless the
chance to warm up. clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- ing displays are functioning properly.
lock). This is a safety feature.
Starting the engine NOTE

5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” up. These will disappear as the engine warms
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni- (Neutral) position. up.
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is On vehicles equipped with continuously
a system that automatically controls fuel variable transmission (CVT), make sure When the engine is hard to start
injection. There is usually no need to depress the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
the accelerator pedal when starting the position. After several attempts, you may experience
engine. that the engine still does not start.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
between attempts to restart the engine. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
1. Make sure all occupants are properly window defogger, are turned off.
seated with seat belts fastened.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
firmly with your right foot.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin- When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20
uously variable transmission (CVT)} or °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
NOTE
 If you have to bring the engine to an emer-
the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press from a standstill even with the selector lever
gency stop while driving, press and hold the
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press
there, then crank the engine. Release the position. it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will
accelerator pedal, immediately after the This phenomenon occurs because the trans- stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.
engine starts. axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does  On vehicles equipped with continuously
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
5 could be flooded with too much gasoline. the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the
engine with the selector lever in any position
While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the
or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), The transaxle will warm up, and you will be engine is stopped with the selector lever in
push the accelerator pedal all the way able to start normally. any position other than the “P” (PARK) posi-
down and hold it there, then press the Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up tion, the operation mode will go to ACC
rather than OFF.
engine switch to crank the engine. If the operation.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds,
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
push the engine switch to stop cranking Stopping the engine tion.
the engine, and release the accelerator N00568200014
pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF.
Wait a few seconds, and then press the WARNING 1. Stop the vehicle.
engine switch to crank the engine again  Do not operate the engine switch while
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
while depressing the brake pedal (CVT) driving except in an emergency. If the depressing the brake pedal.
or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but engine is stopped while driving, the brake 3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle,
do not push the accelerator pedal. If the servomechanism will cease to function and press the engine switch to stop the engine,
engine fails to start, repeat these proce- braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, and then move the gearshift lever to the
dures. If the engine still will not start, con- the power steering system will not func- 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a
tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer tion and it will require greater manual downhill) position.
effort to operate the steering. This could On vehicles equipped with continuously
or a repair facility of your choice for
result in a serious accident. variable transmission (CVT), move the
assistance.
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
Startability of continuously variable trans- and then press the engine switch to stop
mission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient the engine.
temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


vehicle has run down, the emergency key can
If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat- NOTE be used to lock and unlock the passenger’s
ing properly  Remove the object or additional key from the
door.
N00568301054
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the
key slot. The vehicle may not be able to To use the emergency key (A), unlock the
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the receive the registered ID code from the regis-
floor console. Starting the engine and chang- lock knob (B) and remove it from the
tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start
ing the operation mode should be now possi- and the operation mode may not change.
F.A.S.T.-key (C).
ble.
Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
5
F.A.S.T.-key reminder
after starting the engine or changing the oper-
ation mode.
If the operation mode is in OFF and the

driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key
in the key slot, a warning is issued with the
warning light and the buzzer buzzing for
approximately 3 seconds to remind you to
remove the key. NOTE
 Only use the emergency key in an emer-
To operate without using the gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
has run down, replace the battery as soon as
F.A.S.T.-key possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.
NOTE N00514800017
 After using the emergency key, be sure to
 Do not insert into the key slot anything other reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.
than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam- Emergency key
age or a malfunction.
N00515201174 Locking and unlocking the passenger’s
The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.- door
key.
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such Turn the emergency key toward the front of
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the the vehicle to lock the door. After checking
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


that the door is locked, turn the emergency
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE
key back to the center and remove it.
N00561000042  You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro- you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys for your
used to start the vehicle. vehicle from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

5 F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. ming (Except for vehicles sold in
To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle Canada)
and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho- N00561201201
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
codes reprogrammed.
1- Lock system if you have two valid (already regis-
2- Unlock tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis-
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys tered) F.A.S.T.-key.
N00561100056
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
Electronic immobilizer (Anti- procedures below.
2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis-
theft starting system) ter the ID code to the vehicle.
1. Open the driver’s door.
N00529600055
Registering the ID code can be done by your
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
NOTE
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-  Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-
sold in Canada).
key programming is finished. Do not open or
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
close other doors.
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using ming” procedure below.
a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi- If you choose to have your authorized 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-
lizer system. Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-
All of the keys provided with your new vehi- code, take your vehicle and all remaining form the following procedure within 30
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi seconds.)
electronics. Motors dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
slot.
Keyless entry system
N00515500213
Press the remote control transmitter buttons

to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.
It can also help you signal for attention by
When registration of ID code is complete, setting off the panic alarm.
the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
immobilizer indicator will come on for 30 5
seconds.
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming will be terminated and the buzzer
will sound for 3 seconds.
4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the
NOTE
UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
 F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-
press the LOCK button during this time.
nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
5. Release in sequence the LOCK and before the immobilizer warning light starts
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of blinking.
pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per- 1- LOCK ( ) button
form the following procedure within 30
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.- 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
seconds.)
6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press key, repeat the process from step 1 after 3- PANIC button
the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds the operation mode is put in OFF. 4- Operation indicator light
and press the LOCK button during this
time. NOTE
7. Release in sequence the LOCK and  The immobilizer display will go off immedi- To lock
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of ately if the operation mode is put in OFF.
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The
the immobilizer warning light goes off dur- doors and the liftgate.
immobilizer warning light will blink.
ing the procedure. The turn signal lights will also blink once.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE Horn deactivation/reactivation Buzzer deactivation/reactivation

 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the
horn will sound once. The answerback function can be set in the The buzzer answerback function can be
following three ways. turned ON or OFF as required.
One chime: The horn will not sound.

To unlock Setting of door and liftgate unlock
Two chimes: The horn will sound.
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the function
5 Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
LOCK button is pressed twice N00544600098
driver’s door only.
within 1 second. The door and liftgate unlock function can be
Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
set to the following two conditions.
button one more time to unlock all the doors
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
and liftgate.
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- condition of the door and liftgate unlock
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to function.
NOTE 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- Number of
 The door and liftgate unlock function can be Condition
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) chimes
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when during this time.
the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. All doors and the liftgate
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and One chime
Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock unlock
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
function” on page 5-22. Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.
Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva- 1. Put the operation mode in OFF.

Answerback function 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
tion
The horn of the keyless entry system answer- bination headlights and dimmer switch to
back function can be changed as required. The turn signal lights answerback function the “OFF” position.
This is done with the key removed from the can be changes. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
ignition switch. If you want to change the answerback func- onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi during this time.
Motors dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


4. Release in sequence the LOCK and  This device may not cause harmful inter-
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
NOTE ference.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
pressing the LOCK button in step 3.  This device must accept any interference
or unlocked.
received, including interference that may
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
Using the panic alarm cause undesired operation of this device.
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
N00544700060 come on.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-  If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact WARNING
ened, you can acti-vate the alarm to call atten- an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a  Changes or modifications not expressly 5
tion as follows: replacement. approved by the party responsible for
 If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.- compliance could void the user’s authority
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi to operate the equipment.
1 second. Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
key can be programmed for your vehicle.
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
the horn will sound intermittently for
is necessary to register the key with the elec-
Procedure for replacing the
about 3 minutes. remote control transmitter bat-
tronic immobilizer and keyless entry system.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
the remote control transmitter.
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft tery
starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro- N00562100066
gramming” on page 5-20.
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
NOTE electricity from your body by touching a
 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a General information metal grounded object.
button is pressed. N00562000065 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
 The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40 insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-
feet (12 m) away. However, this distance screwdriver into the notch in the case and
may change if your vehicle is near a TV
quency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold use it to open the case.
transmitting tower, a power station, or a
radio station. in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
 If the following conditions are observed after vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but- plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
ton on the remote control transmitter, the Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be Operation is subject to the following two con-
replaced. ditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Door locks
5. Close the case firmly.
6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
WARNING
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
it works.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
NOTE trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
 You may purchase a replacement battery at overcome by heat and suffer serious
an electric appliance store. injury or death due to heat stroke.
5  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can  Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
dren can activate switches and controls,
resulting in an injury or fatal accident.
 When closing a door, make sure that the
NOTE CAUTION door is fully closed and the door-ajar
 When the remote control transmitter case is warning display goes out on the informa-
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. tion screen on the multi-information dis-
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo- play. If the door is ajar it could open while
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
nents. driving and cause an accident.
open the case, the transmitter may come out.
3. Remove the old battery. Door locks To lock and unlock with the key
4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
N00509200547
(driver’s door)
up.
+ side WARNING Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and lock the door. After checking that the door is
locked while driving. locked, turn the key back to the center and
• Locked doors, in combination with the remove it.
- side use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
of ejection in an accident.
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
Coin type especially small children, from opening
battery doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
CR2032
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
from gaining access to your vehicle when
you slow or come
I
nfor
matto
i
onParostop.
videdby:

Door locks
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-
To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door.
the inside
Move the lock knob to the lock position to

lock the door.
All doors should be kept locked while driv-
ing.
5
1- Lock
2- Unlock
NOTE Key reminder system (except

 When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
for vehicles equipped with the
unlocked. F.A.S.T.-key)
To lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate, N00549600253
use the power door lock switches, the key- 1- Lock If the ignition switch is turned off and the
less entry system or the F.A.S.T-key opera- 2- Unlock driver’s door is opened with the key in the
tion. (if so equipped)
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-26,
“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and The driver’s door can be unlocked without sound intermittently to remind you to remove
5-21, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.- using the lock knob by pulling on the inside the key.
key” on page 5-12. door handle.
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, Lock out protection
the passenger’s door can be locked and
unlocked using the emergency key. To lock the door without using N00517300042
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-19. the key If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-
ation mode is in any mode other than OFF
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked when you push the lock knob forward with
position. InformationProvidedby: the driver’s door or passenger’s door open,

Power door locks

the lock knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position.
To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors and liftgate
and liftgate N00563400112
Operation mode ON reminder You can select the functions to unlock the
doors and liftgate either using the ignition
system (vehicles equipped with Using the power door lock switch switch or the engine switch, or using the
the F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) selector lever position {continuously vari-
able transmission (CVT)}.
5 N00503800150
These functions are not activated when the

If the driver’s door is opened while the engine
is stopped and the operation mode is in any vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
position other than OFF, the operation mode vate or deactivate these functions, please
ON buzzer will sound intermittently to contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
remind you to put the operation mode in OFF. dealer.
Power door locks Using the ignition switch or the

N00509300610 engine switch
NOTE All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
 When locking or unlocking with the key on 1- Lock
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will 2- Unlock
lock or unlock.
position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
 Repeated continuous operation between lock
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked
and unlock could activate the power door Using the selector lever position
locking system’s built-in protection circuit, or unlocked by pressing the power door lock
switch on the driver’s or the front passenger {continuously variable transmis-
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper- door. sion (CVT)}
ating the power door lock switch.
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK)
position with the ignition switch or the opera-
tion mode in ON.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Child safety locks for rear door

Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
gers, especially children, from opening the Liftgate
rear door using the inside door handle. N00510100243
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-

vided on each rear door.
WARNING
 It is dangerous to drive with the liftgate
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
rear door cannot be opened using the inside enter the passenger compartment.
door handle.
To open the rear door when the child safety
CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can 5
cause unconsciousness and even death.
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-  When opening and closing the liftgate,
side door handle. make sure that there are no people nearby
When the lever is in the release position (2), and be careful not to hit your head or
the child safety lock is released and the rear pinch your hands, neck, etc.
Child safety locks for rear door can be opened using the inside door han-
door dle.
N00509400291
CAUTION
WARNING  Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
 Always keep the doors tightly closed and
the exhaust could lead to burns.
locked when driving. An unlocked door
may be accidentally opened by a passen-
ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there NOTE
is a greater risk of someone being thrown  Locking and unlocking the doors by using
from the vehicle in an accident. the power door lock switch, the keyless entry
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation also
locks and unlocks the liftgate. (if so
equipped)
1- To lock
2- To release
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Manual window control (if so equipped)
To open NOTE
• Do not hang objects on the gas struts.
After unlocking the tailgate, pull the tailgate
handle upward to open.
CAUTION
 To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
attempt to close the liftgate without releasing
the liftgate grip (A).
1- Unlock  Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con- Manual window control (if so
firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate
opens while driving the vehicle, objects equipped)
CAUTION stored in the luggage compartment could fall N00510700021
out into the road.
 Make sure there is no one standing nearby
when opening the liftgate.
NOTE
 Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations
To close illustrated in order to support the liftgate.
Please observe the following in order to pre-
Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as illus- vent damage or faulty operation:
trated and release it before the liftgate closes • Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts
completely. Gently slam the liftgate from the when closing the liftgate.
outside so that it is completely closed. • Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts. 1- To open
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts. 2- To close
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Power window control
Power window control WARNING Type 1

N00510800370  Never leave the vehicle without carrying
the key.
 Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
Main switch
N00548700130
5
The main switch located on the driver’s door
can be used to operate all the windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
ing the corresponding switch. Type 2
1- Open (down) Press the switch down to open the window,
2- Close (up) and pull up the switch to close it.
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
NOTE window automatically opens/closes com-
 Never try to operate the main switch and pletely. (Type 1)
sub-switch in different directions at the same If the driver’s door window switch is fully
time. This will freeze the window in posi- pressed down, the driver’s door window auto-
tion. matically opens completely. (Type 2)
 Operating the power windows repeatedly If you want to stop the window movement, 1- Driver’s door window switch
with the engine stopped will run down the operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc- 2- Front passenger door window switch
battery. Use the window switches only while tion. 3- Left rear door window switch
the engine is running. 4- Right rear door window switch
5- Lock switch
WARNING
 Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Power window control

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
Sub switch the front passenger’s door is opened, the
WARNING
N00548800098  Before driving with a child in the vehicle,
power windows cannot be operated.
be sure to lock the window switch to make
it inoperative. Children tampering with
Lock switch the switch could easily trap their hands or
N00549000169 heads in the window.
When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-
5 senger door switches cannot be used to open
or close the door windows, and the main Safety mechanism (Driver’s
switch will open or close only the driver’s door window of Type 1 only)
door window. To unlock the switch, press it N00528800122
again.
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the
1- Close door window is automatically lowered a little.
2- Open After the door window is lowered, clear the
Type 1 obstruction, then pull up the switch again to
close the door window.
Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-
senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
dow lock switch is activated. WARNING
Type 2  If the battery terminals are disconnected
or the fuse for electric window is replaced,
NOTE the safety mechanism will be cancelled.
 The rear door windows open only half-way. If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
injury could result.
1- Lock
Power window timer function 2- Unlock
N00548900132 CAUTION
The power windows can be run up or down  The safety mechanism is deactivated just
before the door window closes. This allows
when the ignition switch or the operation
the door window to close completely. There-
mode is in ON.
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
The door windows can be opened or closed trapped in the door window opening.
for a 30-second period after the engine is I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Parking brake
CAUTION What to do if you hear wind To apply

 The safety mechanism is deactivated while buffeting when driving
the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- N00551400043
cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the door window opening. Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
in order to activate the safety mechanism. or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting when driving with one or both
Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result. rear door windows down or partially opened.
5
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
NOTE door windows open, open the front door win-
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the dows as well as the rear door windows to
driving conditions or other circumstances minimize the condition. 1- Pull the lever up without pushing the
cause the door window to be subjected to a button at the end of hand grip.
physical shock similar to that caused by When the parking brake is set and the
trapped hand or head. Parking brake ignition switch or the operation mode is
 If the battery terminals are disconnected or N00511400399 in the “ON” position, the brake warn-
the fuse for electric window is replaced, the ing light in the instrument cluster will
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, come on.
door window will not automatically
open/close completely.
and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a
uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi- Before driving, be sure to release the
If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
tion for vehicles equipped with a manual parking brake.
driver’s door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed. Following this, transaxle, set the selector lever to “P”
release the switch, raise the switch once (PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a
again and hold it in this condition for at least continuously variable transmission (CVT).
1 second, then release it. You should now be
able to operate the driver’s door window in
the normal fashion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Steering wheel height adjustment
To deactivate CAUTION
 Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning lamp will illuminate
and a buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed
5 exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure. A- Wheel lock
B- Release
1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press and hold the button at the end of Steering wheel height WARNING
the hand grip. adjustment  After adjusting, make sure the lever is
3- Push the lever downward.
N00511501254 secured in the locked (A) position.
To adjust the steering wheel to the desired  Do not attempt to adjust the steering
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, position, move the lever upward or down- wheel while driving. This can be danger-
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a ward while moving the steering wheel to the ous.
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. desired level.  When releasing the lever (moving it to the
position (B), be sure to hold the steering
wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering
wheel may slip down too suddenly.
Inside rearview mirror

N00511600317
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Outside rearview mirrors
WARNING To adjust the mirror position

 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
view mirror while driving. This can be It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
dangerous.
left/right to adjust its position.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
ing.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window. 5
To adjust the vertical mirror 1- Daytime position

position 2- Night position
It is possible to move the mirror up and down

to adjust its position. Outside rearview mirrors
N00512200206
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after

To reduce the glare making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to WARNING
reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-  Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
cles behind you during night driving. view mirrors while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Outside rearview mirrors

Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
WARNING tion.
Door mirror heater (if so equipped)
 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. N00549300218
The objects you see in the mirror will look 1- Up
smaller and farther away than they When the rear window defogger switch is
2- Down
appear in a regular flat mirror. pressed with the engine running, the outside
3- Right
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis- rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.
tance of vehicles following you when 4- Left Current will flow through the heater element
5 changing lanes. inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
condensation.
To adjust the mirror position NOTE The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
 After adjusting, return the lever to the “•” the defogger is on.
N00549100144
(OFF) position (C). The heater will be turned off automatically in
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
about 20 minutes.
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC. To fold the mirror
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the Type 1
N00549200099
mirror you wish to adjust.
The outside mirror can be manually folded in
towards the side window to prevent damage
when parking in tight locations.
L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Ignition switch
Type 2 START
Engages the starter. Release the key when the

engine starts.It will automatically return to
the “ON” position.
NOTE 5
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
which the transponder inside the key sends
must match the one registered to the immobi-
lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-
Ignition switch OFF bilizer” on page 5-20.)
N00512400686
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand The engine is off. The key can be inserted and
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- removed only when the switch is in this posi- To remove the key
key)] tion. N00550900201
For information on operations for vehicles 1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- position {continuously variable transmis-
ACC sion (CVT)}.
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and
(F.A.S.T.-key): Allows operation of some electrical accesso- remove it.
Engine switch”on page 5-13. ries with the engine off.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the ON

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
The engine runs and all accessories can be
used.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Starting the engine

For information on operation for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
WARNING
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
ventilated area any longer than is needed
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
engine” on page 5-16. extremely poisonous, could build up and
cause serious injury or death.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
5 Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key)] CAUTION
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
CAUTION Tips for starting  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
at high speeds until the engine has had a
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the  Do not operate the starter motor continu- chance to warm up.
brake servomechanism will cease to function ously for longer than 15 seconds as this  Release the ignition switch as soon as the
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor
could run the battery down or damage the
the power steering system will not function will be damaged.
starter motor. If the engine does not start,
and it will require greater manual effort to
operate the steering. turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for position, wait a few seconds, and then try
a long time when the engine is not running, again. Trying repeatedly with the engine Starting the engine
doing so will cause the battery to be dis- or starter motor still turning will damage
charged. the starter mechanism. This model is equipped with an electronically
 Do not turn the key to the “START” position  If the engine will not start because the bat- controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-
when the engine is running, doing so could tery is weak or discharged, refer to tem that automatically controls fuel injection.
damage the starter motor. “Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2) There is usually no need to depress the accel-
for instructions. erator pedal when starting the engine.
 A longer warm up period will only con- The starter should not be run for more than 15
Starting the engine sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up seconds at a time.
N00512601816 enough for driving when the low coolant To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
temperature indicator goes out. between attempts to restart the engine.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
cator” on page 5-71.
key)] I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: seated with seat belts fastened.
Starting the engine

2. Insert the ignition key. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
3. Make sure the parking brake is applied. tion and make certain that all warning could be flooded with too much gasoline.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with lights are functioning properly before While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
your right foot. starting the engine. or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),
5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” push the accelerator pedal all the way
down (manual transaxle). position without pressing the accelerator down and hold it there, then crank the
pedal. Release the key when the engine engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the igni-
NOTE starts. tion switch to the “OFF” position and
 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few
5
the starter will not operate unless the clutch NOTE seconds, and then crank the engine again
pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock).  Minor noises may be heard on engine start- for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the
up. These will disappear as the engine warms brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal
6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- up. (manual transaxle), but do not push the
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key
(Neutral) position. if the engine starts. If the engine fails to
On vehicles equipped with continuously When the engine is hard to start start, repeat these procedures. If the
variable transmission (CVT), make sure engine still will not start, contact your
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) After several attempts, you may experience local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
position. that the engine still does not start. facility of your choice for assistance.
NOTE 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such Startability of CVT vehicle with
 On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
window defogger, are turned off.
ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20
will not operate unless the selector lever is in
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- 2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin- °C) or lower
tion. uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20
(PARK) position so that the wheels are the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
locked. there, then crank the engine. Release the from a standstill even with the selector lever
accelerator pedal, immediately after the in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
engine starts. position.
This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
NOTE NOTE
 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-  To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the
and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
up. This is normal and not harmful to the and then shift it into reverse.
able to start normally. transaxle.
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
operation. Proper shift points
5
N00537400065
To start
Always use care to change the gear with the
Manual transaxle (if so vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.
equipped) Press the clutch pedal all the way down and Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
N00512700142
shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then and prolong engine life.
gradually release the clutch pedal while
The shift pattern below is shown on the gear- depressing the accelerator pedal.
shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way CAUTION
down while shifting gears.  Avoid downshifting that may cause the
CAUTION tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.
 Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse This puts the engine at risk of being dam-
while the vehicle is moving forward; doing aged.
so will damage the transaxle.
 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
because this will cause premature clutch
wear or damage.
Upshifting
N00512900131
 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position
(illegal in many states). For the best fuel economy and performance in
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest, using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed
because this can result in premature wear of below.
the transaxle shift forks.
At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle
speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise
NOTE conditions (relatively steady speeds) will
 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the improve your fuel economy.
clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then
be easier. Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

Upshift speeds To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake Shift Maximum possible driving
Shift point life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend- points speed
Acceleration Cruise ing a steep hill.
1st gear to 15 mph 15 mph 3rd gear 78 mph (125 km/h)
Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug-
2nd gear (24 km/h) (24 km/h) ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as 4th gear 105 mph (170 km/h)
2nd gear to 28 mph 19 mph when turning a corner or when driving up a
3rd gear (45 km/h) (31 km/h) steep hill.  The table above shows the maximum rec-
ommended driving speed for in each gear.
3rd gear to 36 mph 33 mph Do not drive near or at these speeds for 5
4th gear (58 km/h) (53 km/h) Recommended downshifting speed
prolonged periods of time.
4th gear to 45 mph 45 mph
5th gear (72 km/h) (72 km/h) Downshifting speed Shift point
Continuously variable
Under 20 mph Shift down from cur-
At high altitude locations, upshift as listed (32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear. transmission (CVT) (if so
below. 20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur- equipped)
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear. N00560200050
Shift point Upshift speeds
The CVT will automatically and continuously
1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
Driving precautions change its gear ratio depending on road and
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h) driving conditions. This helps achieve
N00513100244
3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)  Do not use the gearshift lever as a han- smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) drest. This can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks. DRIVING UPHILL
Downshifting Maximum possible driving speed The transmission prevents unnecessary
N00513000096
upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
It is recommended that you downshift to a released and ensures smooth driving.
Shift Maximum possible driving
lower gear when needed to maintain the
points speed
desired speed, according to the table.
Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The 1st gear 28 mph (45 km/h)
engine may suffer damage. 2nd gear 53 mph (85 km/h)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati- Set the selector lever in the gate to
DRIVING DOWNHILL cally when the selector lever is in the “D” operate.
(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
According to the conditions, the transmission the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio pedal. WARNING
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may  Always press the brake pedal when shift-
help reduce your need to use the service ing the selector lever into a selector posi-
brake. tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
5 When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL)
Selector lever operation position while pressing the accelerator
N00560300051 pedal. This will cause the vehicle to
As an additional safety precaution, models “jump” forward or backward.
equipped with a continuously variable trans-
mission have a shift-lock device that holds
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position. NOTE
To move the selector lever from the “P”  To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,
(PARK) position to another position, follow make sure you stop briefly at each position.
After operating, check the position in the
the steps below.
multi-information display.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.  If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
2. Move the selector lever to the desired
selector lever from being moved from the
position.
“P” (PARK) position.
NOTE  For a shift indicated by in the illustra-

 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P” tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
(PARK) to another position if the ignition the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi- selector lever before depressing the brake
tion, or if the key has been removed, or oper- pedal, the selector lever may not move.
ation mode is in “OFF” or “ACC”, or if the
Set the selector lever in the gate to
brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
operate while the brake pedal is
depressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

When the selector lever cannot be Selector lever position display

shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi- N00560400078
tion When the ignition switch is turned to the

N00563300049 “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
When the selector lever cannot be shifted ON, the selector lever position is shown on
from the “P” (PARK) position to another the multi-information display.
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
held down with the ignition switch or the
5
operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat
or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-
tioning. 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an foot.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
repair facility of your choice. release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
selector lever as follows. pressing the screwdriver down.
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
applied.
2. Stop the engine if it is running.
Selector lever positions
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
N00560600067
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
gently as shown to remove the cover.
“P” PARK
This position locks the transmission to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
be started from the “P” (PARK) position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

“R” REVERSE WARNING When a malfunction occurs in

 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when the automatic transaxle
Move the lever to this position only after the stopped on a slope, the engine should be N00549500018
vehicle has come to a complete stop. started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
When the selector lever position
CAUTION on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in indicator blinks
5  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
N00574601023
When the selector lever position indicator

motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” tion.
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
blinks while you are driving, there could be a
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission malfunction in the automatic transaxle system
may be damaged. “D” DRIVE or CVT fluid temperature becomes abnor-
mally high.
This position is used for most city and high-
“N” NEUTRAL way driving. The transmission will automati-
cally and continuously change its gear ratio
At this position, the transmission is disen- depending on road and driving conditions.
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
a manual transaxle and should be used when CAUTION
the vehicle is not moving for an extended  To prevent transmission damage, never shift
length of time during driving, such as in a into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
traffic jam. (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING
 Never move the selector lever to the “N”
“B” BRAKE NOTE
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
you could accidentally slip it into the “P”  The “A” indicator blinks only if the CVT
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position, This position is for use when light engine selector lever switch is broken.
damaging the transmission. braking at high-speed is needed, or driving up It is not seen during normal driving.
very steep hills and for engine braking at low
speeds when descending steep gradients.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

CAUTION Operation of the CVT CAUTION

 If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while N00560801066  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
driving, the indicator will blink. pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
In this case, immediately park your vehicle CAUTION This can damage the CVT.
in a safe place and follow these procedures:  Before selecting a position with the engine Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
[If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec- running and the vehicle stationary, firmly while holding down the brake pedal with the
ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.] depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
cle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
as when performing the same operation with
5
to the “P” (PARK) position and open the CVT is engaged, especially when the engine the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
bonnet. Keep the engine, idling. speed or idle speed is high, or with the air position.
After a while, move the selector lever into conditioning (cooling or heating) operating.
any position other than “P” (PARK) position Do not release the brake pedal until you are
and confirm that the indicator stops blinking. ready to drive away.
Passing acceleration
It is safe to continue driving if the indicator  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
no longer blinks. all times. To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
If the indicator continues blinking or blinks Using the left foot could cause driver move- position (when passing another vehicle) push
intermittently, have your vehicle inspected at ment delay in case of an emergency. the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or  To prevent sudden acceleration, never run automatically downshift.
repair facility of your choice. the engine at high rpms when shifting from
[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2 the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
seconds), the CVT safety device may be  Operating the accelerator pedal while the
Waiting
operating due to a malfunction.] other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of mature wear of brake pads. lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
your choice as soon as possible.
 Use the selector lever in the correct shift position and held stationary with the service
position in accordance with driving condi- brake.
tions. For longer waiting periods with the engine
Never coast downhill backward in the driv- running, place the selector lever in the “N”
ing shift position “D” (DRIVE) or coast for-
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
ward in the “R” (REVERSE) position.
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
and steering effort could lead to an accident. with the service brake.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Service brake
Prior to moving off after having stopped the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in repair facility of your choice as soon as possi-
CAUTION
 It is important not to drive the vehicle with
“D” (DRIVE) position. ble.
your foot resting on the brake pedal when
braking is not required. This practice can
CAUTION Service brake result in very high brake temperatures, pre-
 To avoid transmission overheating, never try N00517500318
mature lining wear, and possible damage to
to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by the brakes.
5 using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake. Brake pedal
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while Power brakes
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler- Overuse of the brake can cause weakening, N00517600436
ation may occur if the selector lever is in a resulting in poor brake response and prema-
position other than “P” (PARK) or “N” Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes
ture wear of the brake pads.
(NEUTRAL). for more braking force with less brake pedal
When driving down a long or steep hill, use
effort.
engine braking by moving the selector lever
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
to “B” (BRAKE) position.
Parking capacity, even if the power assist is not being
used.
WARNING If the power assist is not being used, the effort
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
 Do not leave any objects near the brake needed to press the brake pedal is greater.
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; If you should lose the power assist for some
and then move the selector lever to the “P” doing so could prevent the full pedal reason, the brakes will still work.
(PARK) position. stroke that would be necessary in an If the power brake unit or either of the two
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-
When the CVT makes no speed be operated freely at all times. Make sure
the floor mat is securely held in place.
erly, the rest of the brake system will still
change work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
quickly.
If the CVT does not shift while driving, or You will know this has happened if you find
your vehicle does not pick up enough speed you need to press the brake down farther, or
when starting on an uphill slope, it may be harder when slowing down or stopping, or if
that there is something unusual happening in the brake warning light and the warning dis-
the transmission, causing a safety device to play in the multi-information display come
activate. Have your vehicle checked at an I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: on. Have the brake system repaired at an

Hill start assist (if so equipped)

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice immediately. Hill start assist (if so equipped) CAUTION
N00562600087  Do not perform the following operation
while the hill start assist is operating.
WARNING The hill start assist makes it easy to start off [Except for vehicles equipped with the
 Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. on a steep uphill slope by preventing the F.A.S.T.-key]
Keep the engine running whenever your vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the braking force for about 2 second when you “ACC” position.
engine while driving, the power brake
booster will stop working and your brakes
move your foot from the brake pedal to the [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The
5
accelerator pedal.
will not work as well. hill start assist could stop operating, which
 If the power assist is lost or if either brake could result in an accident.
hydraulic system stops working properly, CAUTION
take your vehicle to an authorized  Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
To operate
N00562700091
ity of your choice immediately. Under certain circumstances, even when hill
start assist is activated, the vehicle may 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- brake pedal.
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily 2. Place the selector lever into the “D” posi-
Brake pad wear alarm loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip- tion.
N00550700124
pery.
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a  The hill start assist is not designed to keep NOTE
metallic squeal when the brake pads have the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the
worn down enough to need service. for more than 2 seconds. selector lever into the “R” position.
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads  When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. as an alternative to depressing the brake 3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
pedal. assist will maintain the braking force
Doing so could cause an accident. applied while stopping for approximately
WARNING 2 seconds.
 Driving with worn brake pads will make it 4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill
harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
start assist gradually will decrease the
braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Brake assist system
NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

 The hill start assist is activated when all of  If the warning is displayed, the hill start  The brake assist system is not a device
the following conditions are met. assist will not operate. Start off carefully. designed to exercise braking force greater
• The engine is running.  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
(The hill start assist will not be activated engine. sufficient distance between vehicles in front
while the engine is starting or immediately Restart the engine and check whether the of you without relying too much on the brake
after the engine is started.) indicator goes out, in which case the hill start assist system.
5 • The selector lever is in any position other
than “P” or “N”.
assist is again working normally.
If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle NOTE
the brake pedal depressed. immediately, but the vehicle should be  Once the brake assist system is operational,
• The parking brake is released. inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi it maintains great braking force even if the
 The hill start assist will not operate if the Motors dealer or a repair facility of your brake pedal is lightly released.
choice as soon as possible. To stop its operation, completely remove
accelerator pedal is depressed before the
brake pedal is released. your foot from the brake pedal.
 The hill start assist also operates when  When the brake assist system is in use while
reversing on an uphill slope. Brake assist system driving, you may feel as if the depressed
 When the hill start assist is activated, you N00567300092
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
may feel the operating sound or vibration motions in conjunction with the operation
The brake assist system is a device assisting noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
from under the body.
This is a normal result of the hill start assist drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
operation, and does not indicate a problem. firmly such as in emergency stop situations assist system is operating normally and does
and provides greater braking force. not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
depress the brake pedal.
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the  When the anti-lock brake system warning
Warning indicator brakes will be applied with more force than light is illuminated, the brake assist system is
N00562800092
usual. not functioning.
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
tem, the following indicator will turn on.
Anti-lock braking system
- ASC indicator N00517900338
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the wheels from locking up when braking.

Anti-lock braking system

This helps maintain vehicle drivability and
steering wheel handling.
CAUTION Anti-lock braking system warn-
 The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent ing light
accidents. It is your responsibility to take N00531600674
Driving hints safety precautions and to drive carefully.
 To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
 When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
braking), steering is slightly different same size and the same type.
from normal driving conditions. Use the 5
steering wheel carefully.
 Always keep a safe distance from the NOTE
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-  You may feel the operating sound or vibra-
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking tion from under the body when driving
system, leave a greater braking distance immediately after starting the engine. This is
when: a normal result the anti-lock braking system
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered makes when performing a self-check. It does
not indicate a problem.
roads.
 The anti-lock braking system can be used If there is a malfunction in the system, the
• Driving on uneven road surfaces.
after the vehicle has reached a speed over anti-lock braking system warning light will
 Operation of anti-lock braking system is approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops come on.
not restricted situations where brakes are working when the vehicle slows below 3 Under normal conditions, the ABS warning
applied suddenly. This system may also mph (5 km/h). light comes on when the ignition switch is
prevent the wheels from locking when
turned to the “ON” position or the operation
you drive over manholes, steel roadwork
mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds
plates, road markings, or any uneven road
later.
surface.
 When the anti-lock braking system is in
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat- CAUTION
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also  Any of the following indicates that the anti-
feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. lock braking system is not functioning and
In this situation, simply hold the brake only the standard brake system is working.
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the (The standard brake system is functioning
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle
brake, which will result in reduced
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
braking performance. a repair facility of your choice.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Electric power steering system (EPS)
CAUTION If the anti-lock braking system Front Rear

• When the ignition switch is turned to the warning light and brake warning
“ON” position or the operation mode is put light illuminate at the same time
in ON, the warning light does not come on
or it remains on and does not go off.
• The warning light comes on while driving
5 If the warning light illuminate

while driving The anti-lock braking system and brake force
N00531700604 distribution function may not work, so hard
braking could make the vehicle unstable.
If only the anti-lock braking sys- Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Electric power steering sys-
tem warning light illuminate authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or tem (EPS)
 Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv- repair facility of your choice. N00568400074
ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. The power steering system operates while the
Test the system by restarting the engine After driving on icy roads engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
and driving at a speed of about 12 mph N00529200080 needed to turn the steering wheel.
(20 km/h) or higher. The power steering system has mechanical
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove
If the warning light then remains off dur- steering capability in case the power assist is
any snow and ice which may have be left
ing driving, there is no abnormal condi- lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an
tion. son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to
However, if the warning light does not cle, but you will notice it takes much more
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the
disappear, or if they come on again when effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
cables located at each wheel.
the vehicle is driven, have the vehicle cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
checked by an authorized MITSUBISHI Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
MOTORS dealer or repair facility of your choice.
choice as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Active stability control (ASC)
WARNING Electric power steering system Active stability control

 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is warning light (ASC)
moving. Stopping the engine would make
N00559100176
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident. The Active stability control (ASC) takes
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control
NOTE function to help maintain the vehicle’s control 5
 During repeated full-lock turning of the and traction. Please read this section in con-
steering wheel (for example, while you are junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking ing system, traction control function and skid
space), a protection function may be acti- control function.
vated to prevent overheating of the power
steering system. This function will make the Anti-lock braking system  P.5-46
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In Traction control function  P.5-50
this event, limit your turning of the steering Skid control function  P.5-50
wheel for a while. When the system has If there is a malfunction in the system, the
cooled down, the steering effort will return warning light will come on.
to normal. Under normal conditions, the warning lamp CAUTION
 If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi- comes on when the ignition switch is turned  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the to the “ON” position or the operation mode is cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
headlights may become dim. This behavior put in ON, and goes off after the engine has from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
is not abnormal. The headlights will return to any other system, has limits and cannot help
started.
their original brightness after a short while. you to maintain traction and control of the
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
CAUTION ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
 If the warning light appears while the engine responsibillty to drive carefully, This means
is running, have the vehicle inspected by an taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a ronmental conditions.
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-  Be sure to use the same specified type and
sible. It may become harder to turn the steer- size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
ing wheel. ASC may not work properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to deactivate the system by pressing down the
CAUTION start moving from a stopped condition. It also “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.
 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
provides sufficient driving force and steering When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
performance as the vehicle turns while press- tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,
may stop functioning properly.
ing the acceleration pedal. momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch;
the indicator is turned off.
NOTE CAUTION
5  An operating sound or vibration may be  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
emitted from under the body in the following road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
situations. The sound or vibration is associ- the vehicle at moderate speeds.
ated with checking the operations of the
ASC. At this time, you may feel a shock
from under the body and the brake pedal if
you depress it. These do not indicate a mal-
Skid control function
N00559300051
function.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the The skid control function is designed to help
“ON” position or the operation mode is put the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
in ON. slippery roads or during rapid steering
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
the engine is turned on. output and the brake on each wheel.
 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a CAUTION
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-  For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch
ing sound from the engine compartment. NOTE should be operated when your vehicle is
This indicates that the system is operating  The skid control function operates at speeds stopped.
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
 When the anti-lock braking system warning normal circumstances.
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
ASC OFF switch
N00559400254 NOTE
Traction control function The ASC is automatically activated when the  Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both
the stability control function and the traction
N00559200076 ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
control function.
On slippery surfaces, the traction control or the operation mode is put in ON. You can
function prevents the drive wheels from spin- I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 When moving out of mud, sand or fresh  The indicator may turn on when you start  The system may be malfunctioning.
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
the engine. This means that the battery volt-
allow the engine speed to increase. In such engine.
age momentarily dropped when the engine
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with Restart the engine and check whether the
was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to indicator goes out. If they go out, there is no
tion, provided that the display goes out
move out your vehicle. abnormal condition. If they do not go out or
immediately.
 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
 When a compact spare tire has been put on
appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop
the vehicle immediately, but you should have
5
your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire
taken operation protection function” will your vehicle inspected by an authorized
will be lower, making it more likely that the
activate and the ASC will turn back on. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
indicator will blink. of your choice as soon as possible.
ASC operation indicator or

ASC OFF indicator ASC warning indicator Towing
N00546500118
N00546600119 N00546300031
ASC operation indicator If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-

-
The indicator will blink when the tem, the following indicator will turn on.
CAUTION
ASC is operating.  When towing the vehicle with only the front
ASC OFF indicator wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the
- - ASC indicator ground, do not place the ignition switch in
This indicator will turn on when the
the “ON” position or do not put the operation
ASC is turned off with the “ASC - ASC OFF indicator mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in
OFF” switch. the “ON” position or putting the operation
mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,
resulting in an accident.
CAUTION Note that the correct towing method depends
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
 When indicator blinks, ASC is operating,
drive configuration.
which means that the road is slippery or that For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-17.
your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.
If this happens, drive slower with less accel-
erator input.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Cruise control (if so equipped)
Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE C- RES + switch

N00518300573  Your speed may increase to more than the set
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use Used to increase the set speed and to return to
Cruise control is an automatic speed control the brake to control your speed. As a result, the original set speed.
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti- the set speed driving is deactivated.
vated at speeds from about 25 mph D- CANCEL switch
(40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at Cruise control switches
5 speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
CAUTION NOTE
 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,  When operating the cruise control switches,
turn off the cruise control for safety. press the cruise control switches correctly.
The set speed driving may be deactivated
 Do not use cruise control when driving con-
automatically if two or more switches of the
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads cruise control are pressed at the same time.
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, To activate
do not move the gearshift lever to the “N” N00518400385
(Neutral) position while driving at a set 1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi-
speed without depressing the clutch pedal. tion or the operation mode is in ON, press
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
The engine will run too fast and might be the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
damaged. Used to turn on and off the cruise control. (A) to turn on the cruise control. The indi-
cator in the meter cluster will come on.
NOTE B- SET - switch
 Cruise control may not be able to keep your Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
speed on uphills or downhills. desired speed.
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


To increase your speed in small amounts,
NOTE press the RES + switch for less than about 1
 When you release the SET - switch, the vehi-
second and release it.
cle speed will be set.
Each time you press the RES + switch, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
To increase the set speed

N00518500344
Accelerator pedal
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. 5
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
RES + switch then press the SET - switch (B) and release
Indicator the switch momentarily to set a new desired
Press and hold the RES + switch (C) while cruising speed.
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
speed, then press and release the SET - set.
switch (B) when the indicator is illumi-
nated. The vehicle will then maintain the
desired speed.
To decrease the set speed

N00518600273
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


then press the SET - switch (B) and release
SET - switch
the switch momentarily to set a new desired
cruising speed.
Press and hold the SET - switch (B) while
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
slow down gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
5 set.
To temporarily decrease the speed
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the

speed. To return to the previously set speed,
To temporarily increase or press the RES + switch (C).
decrease the speed Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
N00541700056 5-55.
To slow down your speed in small amounts, To temporarily increase the speed
press the SET - switch for less than about 1
second and release it.
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
Each time you press the SET - switch, your
normally. When you release the pedal, you
vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6
will return to your set speed.
km/h).
Brake pedal
While driving at the set speed, use the brake

pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


 When the active stability control (ASC)
To deactivate starts operating.
To resume the set speed
N00518800565 N00518900306
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
The set speed driving can be deactivated as on page 5-49. If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
follows: condition described in “To deactivate” on
page 5-55, you can resume the previously set
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF WARNING speed by pressing the RES + switch (C) while
switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned  On vehicles equipped with continuously driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
off.) variable transmission (CVT), although the
or higher. 5
 Press the CANCEL switch (D). set speed driving will be deactivated when
 Depress the brake pedal. shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,
never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving.
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

vated as follow:
 When the engine speed rises and

approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
Under either of the following conditions,
however, using the switch does not allow you
The set speed driving is deactivated automati- CAUTION to resume the previously set speed. In these
cally in any of the following ways.  When the set speed driving is deactivated situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
automatically in any situation other than
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on those listed above, there may be a system  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
vehicles equipped with manual transaxle). malfunction.
switch is pressed.
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed switch to turn off the cruise control and have
your vehicle inspected by an authorized F.A.S.T.-key]
because of a hill, etc. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph of your choice. “ACC” position.
(40 km/h) or less. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]


Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.
 Indicator is turned OFF.
WARNING NOTE
 The compact spare wheel (if so equipped) For details, please contact your authorized
does not have a tire inflation pressure sen- Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Tire pressure monitoring sor.
Type 1
When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
system (if so equipped) sure monitoring system will not work
N00530201553 properly.
5 The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels repair the original tire.
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. NOTE
 The tire pressure monitoring system is not a Type 2
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
tion pressures.
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
as described in “Tires” on page 9-12.
 The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is
installed in the illustrated location.
• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
the metallic air valve (B), replace grommet
and washer (C) with a new one when the
tire is replaced.
• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has
the rubber air valve (D), replace rubber air
valve (D) with a new one when the tire is
replaced.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
Tire pressure monitoring sys- CAUTION should be checked monthly when cold and
tem warning light  If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
N00532701347 mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the operation mode is put in ON, it means vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
that the tire pressure monitoring system is (If your vehicle has tires of a different size
not working properly. Have the system than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. determine the proper tire inflation pressure
5
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the for those tires.)
system may be preventing the monitoring of As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
 If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
pressure telltale when one or more of your
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
tires is significantly under-inflated.
monitoring system warning light will blink
When the ignition switch is turned to the for approximately 1 minute and then remain Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in continuously illuminated. The warning light tale illuminates, you should stop and check
ON, the tire pressure monitoring system will issue further warnings each time the your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
warning light normally illuminates and goes engine is restarted as long as the malfunction them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
off a few seconds later. exists. nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
Check to see whether the warning light goes overheat and can lead to tire failure.
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for off after few minutes driving. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, If it then goes off during driving, there is no and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
the warning light will remain illuminated problem.
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
while the ignition switch or the operation However, if the warning light does not go
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
mode is in ON. off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
Refer to “If the warning light illuminates responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
while driving” on page 5-58 and take the nec- In such situations, a malfunctioning of the sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
essary measures. system may be preventing the monitoring of the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when low tire pressure telltale.
the warning light appears while driving,
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed I
nfdriving.
or
mationPr
ovi
dedby:


Your vehicle has also been equipped with a 2. If the tire pressure monitoring system
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
If the warning light illuminates warning light remains illuminated after
the system is not operating properly. The while driving you have been driving for about 20 min-
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined N00532800501 utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
with the low tire pressure telltale. 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system sure, one or more of the tires may have a
When the system detects a malfunction, the warning light illuminates, avoid hard puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a
telltale will flash for approximately one min- braking, sharp steering maneuvers and puncture, have it repaired by an autho-
ute and then remain continuously illuminated. high speeds. You should stop and adjust rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
5 This sequence will continue upon subsequent the tires to the proper inflation pressure as possible.
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
exists. the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
When the malfunction indicator is illumi- 9-12. WARNING
 If the warning light illuminates while you
nated, the system may not be able to detect or
are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp
signal low tire pressure as intended. NOTE steering maneuvers and high speeds.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- Driving with an under-inflated tire
of reasons, including the installation of sure, do not apply excessive force to the
adversely affects vehicle performance and
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the valve stem to avoid breakage.
can result in an accident.
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
valve stem.
function telltale after replacing one or more
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
CAUTION
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that get into the valve, resulting in damage to the  The warning light may not illuminate imme-
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels tire inflation pressure sensor. diately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-  Do not use metal valve caps, which may leak.
erly. cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
sors. NOTE
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
not covered by your warranty.

NOTE NOTE General information

 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi- N00533000236
on any tire. ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to Your tire pressure monitoring system oper-
Such a spray could damage the tire inflation large variations in ambient temperature, the
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
pressure sensors. tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
Have any puncture repaired by an authorized (causing the warning light come on) when
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the ambient temperature is relatively low. If (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).
 Using the tire repair kit may damage the tire
inflation pressure sensor. The vehicle must
the warning light comes on, adjust the tire
inflation pressure. This device complies with part 15 of FCC 5
promptly be inspected and repaired by an Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer after RSS standard(s).
using the tire repair kit. Whenever the tires and wheels Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
The tire pressure monitoring system may not are replaced with new ones
work normally in the following circum- N00532900153  This device may not cause harmful inter-
stances: If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure ference
sensors are installed, their ID codes must be  This device must accept any interference
 A wireless facility or device using the programmed into the tire pressure monitoring received, including interference that may
same frequency is near the vehicle. system. Have tire and wheel replacement per- cause undesired operation.
 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
and/or on the wheels. dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire
 The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery WARNING
inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel
is dead.  Changes or modifications not expressly
replacement is not done by an authorized approved by the manufacturer for compli-
 Wheels other than Mitsubishi Genuine Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by ance could void the user’s authority to
wheels are being used. your warranty. operate the equipment.
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
tion pressure sensors are being used.
 Wheels whose ID codes are not memo- CAUTION
rized by the vehicle are used.  The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
 Compact spare tire (if so equipped) is fit- the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
ted on a road wheel.
the sensors.
 A window tint that affects the radio wave
signals is installed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
Rear-view camera (if so Location of rear-view camera Reference lines on the screen
equipped)
N00546200144
The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
the left side of the liftgate handle. bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
is in the “R” position with the ignition switch  Red line (B) indicates approximately 20
or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.
5 image will be displayed on the screen of the  Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
Mitsubishi Multi Entertainment System. mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
When the gearshift lever or the selector lever vehicle body.
is shifted out of the “R” position, the rear-  Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-
view image will go off. tance from the rear bumper.
WARNING
 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
to clear the area behind your vehicle.
Always check visually behind and all
CAUTION
around your vehicle for persons, animals,
 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
injury or death.
clean, soft cloth.
 The rear-view camera is an aid system for
 To avoid damaging the camera;
backing up, but it is not a substitute for
your visual confirmation. • Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
 The view on the screen is limited, and
it by using an abrasive compound. 1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
objects outside the view, such as under the • Do not disassemble the camera. rear bumper
bumper or around either corner of the • Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. 2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen. • Do not spray the camera and its surround- 3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
ings with high-pressure water.
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
CAUTION Case 2
 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
lens. As a result, images and distances shown
on the screen are not exact.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
depending on the loading condition of the
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle A- Actual objects 5
width are based on a level, flat road surface. B- Objects shown on the screen
In the following cases, objects shown on the
screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are. CAUTION NOTE
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed  The reference lines for distance and vehicle  Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
down with the weight of passengers and width are intended to indicate the distance to  Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. by sensors.
• When there is an upward slope at the back. They may not indicate correct distance  It is possible to change the display language
(Case 2) depending on the shape of an obstacle. of the screen.
For example, when there is an object behind For details, please refer to the separated
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting owner’s manual for “Mitsubishi Multi Enter-
Case 1 in the direction of the vehicle, the reference tainment System”.
lines on the screen will indicate that point A  Under certain circumstances, it may become
is the farthest point and point B is the closest difficult to see an image on the screen, even
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B when the system is functioning correctly.
are actually the same distance from the vehi- • In a dark area, such as at night.
cle, and point C is farther off than point A
• When water drops or condensation are on
and B.
the lens.
• When sun light or headlights shine directly
A- Actual objects
into the lens.
B- Objects shown on the screen
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Type A

N00519000391
Type B CAUTION
 The red zone indicates an engine speed
1- Tachometer  P.5-62
beyond the range of safe operation.
2- Multi-information display  P.5-62 Select the correct shift position (manual
3- Speedometer  P.5-62 transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con-
4- Multi-information display switch trol the engine speed so that the tachometer
indicator does not enter the red zone.
Speedometer
N00519100262
Multi-information display
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in N00555001318
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour The multi-information display displays the
(km/h). Tachometer odometer, trip odometer, service reminder,
N00519200292 fuel remaining, selector lever position, aver-
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per age fuel consumption, driving range, etc.
minute. This allows the driver to determine
the most efficient selector position and engine
speed combinations.
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
performance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-66
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in OFF, the selector lever position
display and fuel remaining display are not
displayed.
1- Information display  P.5-63

2- Selector lever position display* 
P.5-41
Information display
N00574800015
Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1- Odometer  P.5-64 4- Instrument panel light dimmer control 7- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-67
2- Trip odometer  P.5-64  P.5-65 8- Service reminder (month)  P.5-67
3- Trip odometer 5- Driving range display  P.5-65
 P.5-64
6- Average fuel consumption display 
P.5-66
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the driving range display and average fuel consumption display are not displayed.
 While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch.
Odometer Trip odometer Usage examples for trip odometer , trip

N00574900016 N00575000014 odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the The trip odometer indicates the distance trav-
vehicle has traveled. eled between two points.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

It is possible to measure two currently trav-
Instrument panel light dimmer NOTE
eled distances, from home using trip odom-
eter and from a particular point on the
control  If you press and hold the switch for longer
N00575100015
than about 1 second, the brightness automati-
way using trip odometer . cally scrolls through its different levels, and
Each time you press the multi-information stops scrolling when you release the switch.
display switch (2), there is a sound and the Select your desired level of brightness.
To reset the trip odometer brightness of the instrument panel lights  The brightness level of the instruments is
changes.
To return the display to 0, hold down the
stored when the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position or the operation mode is
5
multi-information display switch for about 1 put in OFF.
second or more. Only the currently displayed Bright Dim
value will be reset.
Driving range display
Example N00575200016
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip This displays the approximate driving range
odometer will be reset. (how many more miles or kilometers you can
drive). When the driving range falls below
approximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is dis-
NOTE played.
 Both trip odometers and can count
up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers. 1- Brightness level
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9 2- Multi-information display switch NOTE
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-  The driving range is determined based on the
meters. fuel consumption data. This may vary
depending on the driving conditions and hab-
 When disconnecting the battery terminal, the NOTE its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
memories of trip odometer displays and  You can adjust to 8 different levels for when rough guideline.
are cleared, and their displays return to the parking lights or headlights are illumi-
 When you refuel, the driving range display is
“0.0 miles/kilometers”. nated and 8 for when they are not.
updated.
Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
However, if you only add a small amount of
the segment display of the brightness level
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
decreases one by one.
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE NOTE
 When your vehicle is stopped on an  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
extremely steep hill, the driving range value mode”.
may, change. This is due to the movement of  Average fuel consumption may vary depend
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any on the driving conditions (road conditions,
breakdown. how you drive, etc.).
 The display setting can be changed to the The actual fuel consumption may differ from
5 preferred units (miles or km).
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
the fuel consumption displayed, so treat the
fuel consumption displayed as just a rough
page 5-68. guideline.
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto 1- Full
Average fuel consumption dis- reset mode setting for the average fuel con- 0- Empty
play sumption display.
N00575300017  The display setting can be changed to the
This displays the average fuel consumption preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}. NOTE
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on  It may take several seconds to stabilize the
from the last reset to the present.
page 5-68. display after refilling the tank.
The reset mode conditions for the average
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
fuel consumption display can be switched
the operation mode in ON, the remaining
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. Fuel remaining display fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel
For information on how to change the aver- N00575400018
level.
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel  The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel
“Changing the function settings” on page level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch tank filler door is located on the left side of
5-68. or the operation mode in ON. the vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank”
on page 3-3.)
NOTE
 The average fuel consumption display can be
reset separately in both auto reset mode and Fuel remaining warning display
manual reset mode.
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- When the remaining fuel level runs low (one
sumption cannot be measured. segment is displayed), the last segment of the
fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

turned to the “ON” position or the operation
mode is changed to ON.
Service reminder NOTE
N00556701266  Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
When the remaining fuel level very runs low
Displays the approximate time until the next km) and the time in units of 1 month.
(no segments displayed), “ ” and the bar
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
graph flash.
displayed when the inspection time has 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
If the warning display appears, refuel as soon
arrived. tion is due. Contact an authorized
as possible.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
NOTE ity of your choice to have the system 5
checked.
 The service reminder time can be modified
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi- displays the time until the next periodic
cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For inspection.
further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE
 When the next periodic inspection is
approaching, the spanner mark will be dis-
Distance played whenever the ignition switch is
turned from the “LOCK” position to the
“ON” position or when the operation mode is
NOTE changed from OFF to ON.
 On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
The spanner mark will continuously be dis-
rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank. Month played, even on non-service reminder dis-
plays (odometer, trip meter, etc.), until the
service reminder is reset.
CAUTION When the service reminder resets, the span-
 Running out of gas could damage the cata- ner mark will not be displayed until the next
lytic converter. If the warning display periodic inspection.
appears, refuel as soon as possible.
1. Shows the time until the next periodic
inspection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly
To reset NOTE
press the multi-information meter switch,
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
the display switches from “---” to
The “---” display can be reset while the igni- tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
“cLEAr”. After that, the time until the
tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF. play is reset and the time until the next
next periodic inspection is shown. periodic inspection is displayed.
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-  If you accidentally reset the display, consult
tion display switch a few times, the infor- an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
5 mation display switches to the service assistance.
reminder display.
Changing the function settings
N00556800143
When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON, the fuel consumption unit,
displayed in the multi-information display,
and the average fuel consumption reset mode
can be modified as desired.
CAUTION
 The customer is responsible for making sure
that regular inspections and maintenance and
CAUTION
 The driver should not operate the display
periodic inspections and maintenance are
while the vehicle is in motion.
performed.
2. Press and hold the multi-information dis- Inspections and maintenance must be per-  When operating the system, stop the vehicle
play switch for about 1 second or more to formed to prevent accidents and malfunc- in a safe area.
make the spanner mark start flashing. (If tions.
there is no operation for about 10 seconds
with flashing, the display will revert to its Changing the reset mode for aver-
original indication.) NOTE age fuel consumption
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the N00575500019
ignition switch or the operation mode is in You can change the mode condition for the
ON.
average fuel consumption display to “Auto
reset” or “Manual reset”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa- [Except for vehicles equipped with the
tion display switch a few times, the infor- F.A.S.T.-key]
NOTE
 The average fuel consumption display can be
mation display switches to the driving Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
reset separately for the auto reset mode and
range display. tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
for the manual reset mode.
Refer to “Information display” on page
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
5-63. from memory the manual reset mode or auto
2. Each time you press the multi-information key]
reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
display switch for 1 second or more on Change the operation mode to ON from
driving range display, you can switch ACC or OFF.
sumption display.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
5
reset mode for average fuel consumption. mode”.
(A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset Auto reset mode
mode)
 When the average fuel consumption is Changing the fuel consumption
being displayed, if you hold down the
Auto reset mode Manual reset mode display unit
multi-information display switch, these
N00557100156
calculations will be reset to zero.
 When the engine switch or the operation The fuel consumption display unit can be
mode is in the following conditions, the changed. The distance and amount units are
average fuel consumption display will also switched to match the selected fuel con-
automatically reset. sumption unit.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
F.A.S.T.-key] tion display switch a few times, the infor-
The ignition switch has been set to the mation display switches to the average
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4 fuel consumption display.
Manual reset mode Refer to “Information display” on page
hours or more.
 When the average fuel consumption is 5-63.
being displayed, if you hold down the [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- 2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
multi-information display switch, these key] play switch for about 5 seconds or more
calculations will be reset to zero. The operation mode has been set to ACC until buzzer sound is heard twice.
 When the following operation is per- or OFF for about 4 hours or more.
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Indicator and warning light package

3. Press and hold the multi-information dis- Distance
play switch to switch in sequence from
NOTE Fuel consumption
 The display units for the driving range, the
(driving range)
“km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg” 
average fuel consumption are changed, but km/L km
“km/L”.
the units for the indicating needle (speedom-
L/100 km km
eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and the
service reminder will remain unchanged. mpg mile (s)
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
5 the unit setting is erased and it returns auto-
matically to factory setting.
The distance units is also changed in the fol-

lowing combinations to match the selected
fuel consumption unit.
Indicator and warning light package

N00519800849
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Indicators
1- High beam indicator  P.5-71 19- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
High beam indicator
2- Electric power steering system warning indicator/warning light  P.5-51, 5-51
N00520100086
light  P.5-48 20- ECO indicator  P.5-71
21- For details, refer to “Warning activa- A blue light comes on when the headlights
3- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-
tor” on page 5-15 (if so equipped) are on high beam.
ing light (if so equipped)  P.5-57
4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning 22- For details, refer to “Warning activa-
lights  P.5-71 tor” on page 5-15 (if so equipped) Front fog light indicator (if so
5- Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) 5
equipped)  P.5-71 Indicators N00520200175
6- Door-ajar warning light  P.5-74 N00519900127
7- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) This indicator comes on while the front fog
warning light  P.4-27 lights are on.
8- High coolant temperature warning light
Turn signal indicators/Hazard
(red)  P.5-73 warning lights
Low coolant temperature indi-
9- Low coolant temperature indicator N00520000216
(green)  P.5-71 The arrows will flash in time with the corre- cator - green
10- Oil pressure warning light  P.5-73 sponding exterior turn signals when the turn N00575600010
11- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER- signal lever is used. This indicator comes on in green while the
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check coolant temperature is low.
engine light”)  P.5-72 Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
12- Charging system warning light  ing flasher switch is pressed.
NOTE
P.5-73  When the indicator goes out, this should be
13- Brake warning light  P.5-72 NOTE used as a rough indication of when the heat-
14- Anti-lock braking system warning light  If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if ing starts working.
 P.5-47 the indicator stays on without flashing, check
15- Multi-information display  P.5-62 for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
16- Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning turn signal connection. ECO indicator
light  P.4-11 N00568800036
17- Cruise control indicator (if so
equipped)  P.5-52 This indicator comes on while fuel-efficient
18- Active stability control (ASC) indica- driving is achieved.
tor/warning light  P.5-51, 5-51
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Warning lights
Warning lights CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator

N00520300147  If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”
braking system warning light are illuminated
at the same time, the braking force distribu- or “Check engine light”)
Brake warning light and buzzer tion function will not operate, the vehicle N00520500804
N00520400526
may be destabilized during sudden braking This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
This light comes on when the ignition switch under the following conditions. nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
5 is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or • When the brake warning light does not go
out even when the parking brake is
emissions, engine control system or continu-
the operation mode is put in ON. ously variable transmission (CVT) control
When the engine is started, the light should released.
system. If a problem is detected in one of
go off a few seconds later. • When the brake warning light stays on
these systems, this indicator illuminates or
The warning light also illuminates after start- while driving.
flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to
ing the engine under the following condi- If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
the “ON” position or the operation mode is
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in a
tions. put in ON, this indicator normally comes on
safe place, and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility and goes off after the engine has started.
 When the parking brake is still applied.
of your choice as soon as possible.
 When the brake fluid level is low. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
 When the brake system circuit is not filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
following manner when brake performance
working properly. is deteriorated. indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 you press down on the brake pedal harder properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
mph (8 km/h) and the parking brake applied, than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal until you hear clicking sounds.)
a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that may go all the way to the floor. If this indicator does not go off after several
the parking brake is not properly release. • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking seconds or lights up while driving, have the
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the system checked as soon as possible at an
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake parking brake. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
is fully released and the brake warning light Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the repair facility of your choice.
is off. stop lights and to alert the vehicles behind
you.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Warning lights
CAUTION NOTE Oil pressure warning light

 Driving for a long time with the engine mal-  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the N00520700170
function indicator on may cause more dam- engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE This light comes on when the engine oil pres-
age to the emission control system. This ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is
sure is below normal. If the light stays on
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- on.
while driving, stop the engine as soon as pos-
ity. The engine electronic control module stores
critical OBD information (especially exhaust sible. Do not run the engine until the cause of
 If this indicator does not come on when the
the low oil pressure is corrected.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
5
the system checked at an authorized malfunction indicator is on. This will make it CAUTION
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If this light comes on when the engine oil
of your choice. lems.
level is not low, have your vehicle checked at
 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
while the engine is running, avoid driving at repair facility of your choice.
high speeds. Charging system warning light  This warning light does not show the amount
During vehicle operation with the indicator of oil in the crankcase. This can only be
N00520600313
on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you determined by checking the oil level with the
depress the accelerator pedal. This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
dipstick with the engine turned off.
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi- tion in the charging system or when the igni-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
more firmly than usual since the engine (engine off) or the operation mode is put in
idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi- ON. When the engine is started, the light High coolant temperature
cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to should go out. Check to make sure that the warning light - red
creep forward. light has gone out before driving. N00575700011
This light comes on in red if the coolant tem-

CAUTION perature becomes excessively high.
 If the warning light stays on while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
as soon as possible and contact an authorized
of your choice to have the system checked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

The combinations of switch operations and
CAUTION CAUTION illuminated lights differ in accordance with
 If the light comes on during vehicle opera-  Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar
the following conditions.
tion, it indicates that the engine is possibly warning light is off.
overheating. Continued driving could make Except for vehicles equipped with daytime
the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle
running lights
in a safe place and take appropriate action. NOTE OFF All lights off
(Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.)
 When the auto cut-out function of the doom
5 light is been activated, the light goes out Parking, tail, front and rear side-
automatically after about 30 minutes. marker lights, license plate and
NOTE Refer to “Dome light” on page 5-106. instrument panel lights on
 The high coolant temperature warning light
may illuminate when the vehicle has been Headlights and other lights on
driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
illuminating does not necessarily indicate a
Combination headlights and
Vehicles equipped with daytime running
problem. It should stop if you keep the dimmer switch lights
engine running for a while or continue driv- N00522500736
ing the vehicle.
[When the engine is started, and the parking
Headlights brake is released]
Door-ajar warning light and The daytime running lights will be illumi-
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
buzzer nated:
N00520900329
This light comes on when any door or the lift- The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
gate is open or not completely closed. nated
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 The daytime running lights illumi-
mph (8 km/h) and any door or the liftgate is nated
open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times to Parking, tail, front and rear side-
inform the driver that any door or the liftgate marker lights, license plate and
is not properly shut. instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

 If the following operation is performed
NOTE NOTE with the combination headlights and dim-
 Once the daytime running light come on,  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
they do not go out until the ignition switch is washed, the inside of the lens sometimes mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or becomes foggy. This is the same as when the lights automatically turn off after
the operation mode is changed to OFF or window glass mists up on a humid day, and about 3 minutes.
ACC. does not indicate a problem. When the light
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. [Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
[When the engine is not running, or when the
However, if water collects inside the light,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” 5
engine is running but the parking brake is not Motors dealer or a repair facility of your or “ACC” position or the key is removed
released] choice. from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is not opened.
The engine starts when the lights are off.
Light auto-cutout function [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
OFF All lights off (headlights and other lights) key]
Parking, tail, front and rear side- N00532600570 The operation mode is changed to OFF or
marker lights, license plate and  If the following operation is performed ACC and the driver’s door is not opened.
instrument panel lights on with the combination headlights and dim-
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
Headlights and other lights on the lights automatically turn off.
NOTE
 The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the vated.
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key] See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights dealer for details.
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
on for a long period of time when the engine or “ACC” position or the key is removed
is not running. The battery will run down.
from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is opened.
When you want to keep the lights
on:
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key] If the combination headlights and dimmer
The operation mode is changed to OFF or
switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
ACC and the driver’s door is opened.
tion again after the engine is turned off, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: about 3-minute auto-cutout function

Turn signal lever

described above will not work. The lights (the
parking lights, tail lights and license plate
Dimmer (high/low beam NOTE
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto- change)  You can flash the high beams by pulling the
lever toward you, even if the light switch is
matically. N00549900142
off.
To change the headlights from high beam to  If you turn the lights off with the head lights
Headlight reminder buzzer low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal set to high-beam illumination, the headlights
N00549800226
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low are automatically returned to their low-beam
beam as a courtesy whenever there are
5 [When using a key to start the engine] oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic
setting when the light switch is next turned
to the “ ” position.
If the driver’s door is opened with the key in moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue
the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed light in the instrument cluster indicates when
from the ignition switch while the lights are the headlights are on high beam.
on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn Turn signal lever
off the lights. N00522600519
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual

[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-
engine] tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
If the driver’s door is opened with the opera- when you let go. Use the full position (2)
tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the when making a normal turn. The lever will
operation mode is changed to OFF while the return to the neutral position when the turn is
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind complete. There may be times when the lever
you to turn off the lights. does not return to the neutral position. This
usually happens when the steering wheel is
In either case, the lights will turn off automat- turned only slightly. You can easily return the
ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn lever by hand.
the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly
the tone. Headlight flasher then release it, the turn signal lights and the
N00550000185
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
You can flash the high beams by pulling the flash three times.
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will
go back to normal when you let go. While the
high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
the instrument panel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Hazard warning flasher switch

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details. Front fog light switch (if so
equipped)
Hazard warning flasher N00522800393
switch The front fog lights illuminate only when the

N00522700318 headlights are on low beam.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”
position turns on the front fog lights as well 5
as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
NOTE The knob will return to the neutral position
 A light in the instrument panel flashes to when it is released.
show when the turn signal lights are working
properly.
If this light flashes faster than usual, check
for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
functioning connection in the signal. If you press the flasher switch, the turn sig-
If the panel light does not come on when the
nals will flash intermittently, and so will the
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
burned out bulb in the panel.
hazard warning lights. This is an emergency
Have the system inspected by your autho- warning system and should not be used when
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair the vehicle is in motion, except for emergen-
facility of your choice. cies.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
• Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash will keep working after the ignition switch is
function for lane changes. removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.
• Adjust the time required to operate the
NOTE
lever for the 3-flash function.  If the headlights are switched to high beam,
NOTE the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
• Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer
 If the flashers are used for several hours, the minate again when the headlights are
as the turn signal lights flash.
battery will run down. This could make it switched back to low beam.
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Wiper and washer switch

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
NOTE motor may be damaged.
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or
“ ” position while the front fog lights are
illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
They can be turned back on again by rotating
the combination headlights and dimmer
switch back to “ ” position, and turning
5 the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-
tion.
 Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may 1- Fast
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers. 2- Slow
MIST- Misting function

N00523000666
The wipers will operate once. NOTE
OFF- Off  The speed-sensitive-operation function of
CAUTION INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) the windshield wipers can be deactivated.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the LO- Slow For further information, please contact your
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may HI- Fast authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm repair facility of your choice.
the glass with the defroster before using the
washer. To adjust intermittent intervals Misting function
With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive The misting function can be used when the
intermittent operation) position, the intermit- ignition switch or the operation mode is in
Windshield wipers tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the ON or ACC.
knob (A). The wipers will operate once if the wiper
The windshield wiper and washer can be lever is raised to the “MIST” position and
operated with the ignition switch or the oper- released. This operation is useful when it is
ation mode is in ON or ACC. drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear window wiper and washer NOTE

N00523200408  On vehicles with CVT, to ensure a clear rear-
The rear window wiper and washer can be ward view, the wiper perform several contin-
operated when the ignition switch or the uous operations when the reverse gear is
operation mode is in ON or ACC. engaged and the switch is in the “INT” posi-
tion.
Turn the knob to operate the rear window Following this continuous operation, the
wiper. wiper will automatically switch to intermit-
tent operation.
5
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• Adjustment of the interval for intermittent
operation.
• Changing intermittent wiper operation to
Windshield washer continuous wiper operation.
N00504600298 See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
To turn on the windshield washer, pull the dealer for details.
lever toward you with the ignition switch or  The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
the operation mode is in ON or ACC. engine compartment.
The wipers will wipe automatically several Check the fluid level regularly and refill if
times when the washer fluid is sprayed. necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page
9-9.)
To turn off the spray, release the lever. OFF- Off
INT- The wiper operates continuously for
several seconds then operates inter-
mittently at intervals of about 8 sec- Precautions to observe when
onds. using wipers and washers
- Washer fluid will be sprayed onto N00523500254
the rear window glass while the

knob is turned fully in either direc- CAUTION
tion.  If the washer is used in cold weather, washer
When the washer fluid is sprayed, fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze,
the wiper will automatically operate blocking your view. Heat the glass with the
2 or 3 times. defroster before using the washer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE Electric rear window defog- Type 2

 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
ger switch
N00523700403
wiper blades prematurely.
 Before using the wipers in cold weather, The rear window defogger can be used when
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not the engine is running.
frozen to the windshield or rear window. The indicator light (A) will come on when
5 Using the wipers while the blades are frozen
could cause the wiper motor to burn out.
you press the electric rear window defogger
switch. Electric current will flow through the
 If the wipers are left on the glass out of the heating wires on the rear window to help
parked position and they become blocked by clear away moisture or frost.
ice or other deposits on the glass, the motor After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-
may still burn out even if the wiper switch is
tem will shut off automatically.
OFF. If deposits form on the windshield, Type 1
To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
engine, and clean the glass so that the wipers utes have passed, press the switch again. The
can operate smoothly. indicator light will go out and the defogger
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec- will turn off.
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer If you need the defogger for more than 20
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or minutes, press the switch again. This will add
the pump may fail. 20 more minutes.
 During cold weather, add a recommended
washer solution that will not freeze in the
washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer
CAUTION
may not work or may be damaged.  The rear window defogger is not designed to
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
 Replace the wiper blades when they are
before using the rear window defogger.
worn. Use the proper size replacement
blades. For further information, please con-  Use the rear window defogger only after the
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors engine has started and is running. Be sure to
dealer. turn the defogger switch off immediately
after the window is clear to save on battery
power.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Horn switch
their end user license agreements, please go
CAUTION Link System (if so equipped) to the following website.
 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items N00563700043 http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-
that are attached with adhesive over the grid
The Link System takes control of the devices closure.pdf
wires on the rear window.
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a connected via the USB input terminal or the
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the con- Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so
wires. nected devices to be operated by using the equipped)
switches in the vehicle or voice commands.
N00563901257
5
See the following section for details on how
NOTE to operate.
 If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir- For vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi
rors, mist can also be removed from the out- Multi Entertainment System (MMES)
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page
side rearview mirrors when the rear window
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door 5-81. For information on operations for vehicles
mirror heater” on page 5-34.) Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-101. equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi Entertain-
Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” ment System (MMES), refer to the separate
on page 7-27. owner’s manual for details.
Horn switch Refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth®
N00523800185
device” on page 7-35. Except for vehicles equipped with Mit-
subishi Multi Entertainment System
To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of (MMES)
on the steering wheel. BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak-
ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle
Link System End User License
using a cellular phone compatible with a
Agreement wireless communication technology com-
monly known as Bluetooth®. It also allows
N00563800015
You have acquired a device that includes soft-

the user to play music, saved in a Bluetooth®
ware licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
music player, through the vehicle’s speakers.
tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the
The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
automotive experience business unit), and
tion function, which allows you to make
their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a
hands-free calls by simple switch and voice
complete listInof
f
or these
mat
ionPr
ov3rd
i party
dedby: products and
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

command operations using a defined voice
tree.
NOTE NOTE
 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
if the operation mode is left in ACC, the
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used refer to the following website:
accessory power will automatically turn off [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
when the ignition switch or the operation after a certain period of time and you will no You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
mode is in ON or ACC.
longer be able to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 America website.
interface. The accessory power comes on [For vehicles sold in Canada]
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
5 face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device
again if the engine switch is operated.
Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function”
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
site.
and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con- on page 5-14. Please read and agree to the “Warning about
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”,
necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and the websites mentioned above may connect
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
Bluetooth® device” on page 5-87. you to websites other than the Mitsubishi
or the device power is turned off.
Motors website.
 Hands-free calls will not be possible if your
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of phone does not have service available.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. ucts/index.html
 If you place the Bluetooth® device in the  Software updates by cellular phone/digital
cargo area, you may not be able to use the audio device manufacturers may
WARNING Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. change/alter device connectivity.
 Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface  Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you Steering control switch and microphone 
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
choose to use the cellular phone while P.5-83
 You can confirm the Link System software
driving, you must not allow yourself to be Voice recognition function  P.5-84
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3
distracted from the safe operation of your Useful voice commands  P.5-85
times (press and hold 2 times and then press
vehicle. Anything, including cellular
briefly) within 10 seconds. Speaker enrollment function  P.5-86
phone usage, that distracts you from the
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
safe operation of your vehicle increases
your risk of an accident. the Bluetooth® device  P.5-87
 Refer to and comply with all state and Operating a music player connected via Blue-
local laws in your area regarding cellular tooth®  P.5-91
phone usage while driving. How to make or receive hands-free calls 
P.5-91
Phonebook function  P.5-94
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


• In such circumstances, you can press the
Steering control switch and Volume down button
button briefly to switch between callers.
microphone You will switch to the first caller and the
N00564000072 Press this button to decrease the volume. other caller will be put on hold.
• To establish a three-way call in such situ-
SPEECH button ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
voice recognition mode and then say
 Press this button to change to voice recog- “Join calls.”
nition mode. 5
While the system is in voice recognition
mode, “Listening” will appear on the
HANG-UP button
audio display.  Press this button when an incoming call is
 If you press the button briefly while in received to refuse the call.
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt  Press this button during a call to end the
prompting and allow voice command current call.
input. When another call is on hold, you will
Pressing the button longer will deactivate switch to that call.
the voice recognition mode.  If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
1- Volume up button  Pressing this button briefly during a call nition mode, the voice recognition mode
2- Volume down button will enable voice recognition and allow will be deactivated.
3- SPEECH button voice command input.
4- PICK-UP button
5- HANG-UP button NOTE
PICK-UP button
6- Microphone  When you press the SPEECH button to enter
voice recognition mode with a cellular phone
 Press this button when an incoming call is
paired to the system, current information on
received to answer the telephone.
the cellular phone, such as “remaining bat-
Volume up button  When another call is received during a tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”
call, press this button to put the first caller will be displayed on the audio display.*
Press this button to increase the volume. on hold and talk to the new caller. *: Some cellular phones will not send this
information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap- 4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-
NOTE anese. The factory setting is “English.” guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-
 Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
nese.” Say the desired language.
by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is (Example: “English”)
possible to use those services with your cel- NOTE
 If the voice command that you say differs
5. The voice guide will say “English (Span-
lular phone.
from the predefined command or cannot be ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this
recognised due to ambient noise or some correct?” Say “Yes.”
Microphone If you say “No,” the system will return to
5 other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
Step 4.
will ask you for the voice command again up
Your voice will be recognized by a micro- to 3 times.
phone in the overhead console, allowing you  For best performance and further reduction NOTE
to make hands-free calls with voice com- of ambient noise, the vehicle windows  The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
mands. should be closed, lower the blower speed and sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
refrain from conversation with your passen- rent language, and the second message is in
gers while engaging the voice recognition the selected language.
NOTE function.  If many entries are registered in the vehicle
 If a cellular phone is within close proximity  Some voice commands have alternative phonebook, changing the language will take
of the microphone, it may distort the sound commands. a longer time.
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone  Depending on the selected language, some  Changing the language deletes the mobile
as far as possible from the microphone. functions may not be available. phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
 Language can be changed by using the audio interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
control panel besides the following proce- to import it again.
Voice recognition function dure.
N00564100086 For details, refer to “To change the language
(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)” on 6. When the voice guide says “English
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped page 7-25. (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”
with a voice recognition function. the language change process will be com-
Simply say voice commands and you can per- pleted and the system will return to the
form various operations and make or receive Selecting the language main menu.
hands-free calls.
1. Press the SPEECH button.
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- 2. Say “Setup.”
ognition is possible for US English, North 3. Say “Language.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


allows you to decrease the possibility that a 1. Press the SPEECH button.
Useful voice commands setting is accidentally changed. 2. Say “Setup.”
N00564200016
The confirmation function can be turned on 3. Say “Passcode.”
or off by following the steps below. 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-
Help function abled. Would you like to enable it?”
N00564300017 1. Press the SPEECH button. Answer “Yes.”
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped 2. Say “Setup.” Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
3. Say “Confirmation prompts.” passcode and return to the main menu.
with a help function.
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting 4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
5
for a voice command input, the system will prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
tell you a list of the commands that can be turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.” It will be required to use this system.”
used under the circumstances. Answer “Yes” to change the setting or Say a 4-digit number which you want to
answer “No” to keep the current setting. set as a passcode.
5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
Canceling prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys- guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-
N00564400018
tem will return to the main menu. code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
There are 2 cancel functions. Answer “No” to return to the passcode
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to Security function input in Step 5.
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. N00564600023 7. When the registration of the passcode is
If you are anywhere else within the system, It is possible to use a passcode as a security completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. function by setting a passcode of your choice code is enabled” and the system will
return to the main menu.
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Confirmation function setting When the security function is turned on, it is
N00564500019
necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit NOTE
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped passcode in order to use all functions of the  Passcode will be required to access the sys-
with a confirmation function. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep- tem after the next ignition cycle.
With the confirmation function activated, you tion.
are given more opportunities than normal to
confirm a command when making various Setting the passcode
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This Use the following procedure to turn on the
security function by setting a passcode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


You can turn a voice model registered with
NOTE Disabling the passcode
the speaker enrollment function on and off
 It is required for a little time after engine
Use the following procedure to turn off the whenever you want.
stop that the entered passcode is actually
recorded in the system. security function by disabling the passcode.
If the ignition switch or the operation mode Speaker enrollment
is made to ACC or ON or the engine is NOTE N00564800038
started immediately after engine stop, there
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass- It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
5 is a case when the entered passcode is not
recorded in the system. At this time, please
code. speaker enrollment process.
try to enter the passcode again. To ensure the best results, run through the
1. Press the SPEECH button. process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
Entering the passcode 2. Say “Setup.” ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
3. Say “Passcode.” there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
If a passcode has been set and the security 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
function is enabled, the voice guide will say enabled. Would you like to disable it?” phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass- Answer “Yes.” interruption of the process.
code to continue” when the SPEECH button Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of Use the following procedure for speaker
is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. the passcode and return to the main menu. enrollment.
Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the 5. When the disabling of the passcode is
passcode. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice code is disabled” and the system will
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect tion (manual transaxle), or the selector
return to the main menu. lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-
passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct
passcode. uously variable transmission (CVT)), and
Speaker enrollment function pull the parking brake lever.
NOTE N00564700011
NOTE
 You can reenter the passcode as many times The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the
 Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the
as you want. speaker enrollment function to create a voice
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the
 If you have forgotten your passcode, say model for one person per language. vehicle in a safe area before attempting
“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 speaker enrollment.
then check with an authorized Mitsubishi
interface to recognise voice commands said
Motors dealer.
by you.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: 2. Press the SPEECH button.


3. Say “Voice training.” 2. Say “Voice training.”
4. The voice guide will say “This operation
NOTE 3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-
 To repeat the most recent voice training com-
must be performed in a quiet environment ment process once already, the voice
mand, press and release the SPEECH button.
while the vehicle is stopped. See the guide will say either “Enrollment is
 If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
owner’s manual for the list of required enabled. Would you like to disable or
during the process, the system will beep and
training phrases. Press and release the stop the speaker enrollment process. retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled.
SPEECH button when you are ready to Would you like to enable or retrain?”
begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can- 4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice
cel at any time.” 6. When all enrollment commands have model is on; when enrollment is “dis-
5
Press the SPEECH button to start the been read out, the voice guide will say abled,” the voice model is off. Say the
speaker enrollment process. “Speaker enrollment is complete.” The command that fits your needs.
system will then end the speaker enroll- Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll-
ment process and return to the main
NOTE ment process and recreate a new voice
menu. model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on
 If you do not start the speaker enrollment
process within 3 minutes after pressing the page 5-86.)
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment NOTE
function will time out.  Completing the speaker enrollment process
The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll- will turn on the voice model automatically. Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0
ment has timed out.” The system will then  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not interface and Bluetooth® device
beep and the voice recognition mode will be work in this mode. N00565000170
deactivated.
Before you can make or receive hands-free
Enabling and disabling the voice calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. interface function, you must pair the Blue-
Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in model and retraining
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
table “Enrollment commands” on page N00564900055
5-101. You can turn a voice model registered with

The system will register your voice and the speaker enrollment function on and off
then move on to the registration of the whenever you want.
next command. Continue the process until You can also retrain the system.
all phrases have been registered. Use the following procedure to perform these
actions.
1. Press the ISPEECH

nf
ormat
ionPr
ovbutton.
i
dedby:


1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
NOTE gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi- digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.
 Pairing is required only when the device is
tion (manual transaxle), or the selector When the confirmation function is on, the
used for the first time. Once the device has
lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin- system will confirm whether the number
been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- uously variable transmission (CVT)), and said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”
face, all you need is to bring the device into
pull the parking brake lever. Answer “No” to return to pairing code
the vehicle next time and the device will
selection.
connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-
NOTE
5 matically (if supported by the device). The
NOTE
device must have Bluetooth ®
turned ON to  You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
connect. the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
ual for pairing code requirements.
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
 The pairing code entered here is only used
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. location. for the Bluetooth® connection certification.
It is any 4-digit number the user would like
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are to select.
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or 2. Press the SPEECH button. Remember the pairing code as it needs to be
music player most recently connected is auto- 3. Say “Setup.” keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 4. Say “Pairing Options.” pairing process.
interface. 5. The voice guide will say “Select one of Depending on the connection settings of the
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to Say “Pair.” entered each time you connect the Blue-
be connected. tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
NOTE face. For the default connection settings,
refer to the instructions for the device.
To pair  If 7 devices have already been paired, the
voice guide will say “Maximum devices
paired” and then the system will end the
To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue- 7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
pairing process. To register a new device,
procedure on the device. See the device
tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below. delete one device and then repeat the pairing
manual for instructions.” Enter in the
process.
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you
device” on page 5-89.) have registered in Step 6.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com- When the confirmation function is on, the
NOTE plete,” after which a beep will be played system will ask you again whether the
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may and the pairing process will end. phone that you want to connect to is cor-
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue- rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con-
tooth® 2.0 interface. nect to the cellular phone.
Selecting a device
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- N00565100025
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide say “Please say.” Say the number of the
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are phone that you want to connect to.
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-
ing process will be cancelled. available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or 5
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup- music player most recently connected is auto- NOTE
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again. matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0  You can connect to a phone at any time by
 If you enter the wrong number, the voice interface. pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair- You can connect to the other paired cellular number, even before all of the paired num-
ing process will be cancelled. phone or music player by following setting bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-
Confirm the number is right, and try pairing change procedures. lar phones are read out by the system.
it again.
To select a cellular phone 5. The selected phone will be connected to

8. The voice guide will say “Please say the the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice
name of the device after the beep.” You 1. Press the SPEECH button. guide will say “<device tag> selected”
can assign a desired name for the Blue- 2. Say “Setup.” and then the system will return to the
tooth® device and register it as a device 3. Say “Select phone.” main menu.
tag. Say the name you want to register 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
after the beep. the numbers of the cellular phones and
To select a music player
device tags of corresponding cellular
NOTE phones will be read out in order, starting 1. Press the SPEECH button.
 When the confirmation function is on, after
with the cellular phone that has been most 2. Say “Setup.”
repeating the device tag you have said, the recently connected. 3. Say “Select music player.”
voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” Say the number of the cellular phone that
Answer “Yes.” you want to connect to.
To change the device tag, answer “No” and
then say the device tag again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” 7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and
Deleting a device
the numbers of the music players and then the system will end the device dele-
device tags of corresponding music play- Use the following procedure to delete a tion process.
ers will be read out in order, starting with paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue-
the music player that has been most NOTE
recently connected. tooth® 2.0 interface.
 If the device deletion process fails for some
Say the number of the music player that 1. Press the SPEECH button. reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
you want to connect to. failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
5 When the confirmation function is on, the
2. Say “Setup.”
ing the device.
3. Say “Pairing Options.”
system will ask you again whether the 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
music player that you want to connect to the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and To check a paired Bluetooth®
Say “Delete.”
connect to the music player. 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” device
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will the numbers of the devices and device N00565200013
say “Please say.” Say the number of the tags of corresponding devices will be read You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by
music player that you want to connect to. out in order, starting with the device that following the steps below.
has been most recently connected. After it
NOTE completes reading all pairs, the voice 1. Press the SPEECH button.
 You can connect to a music player at any guide will say “or all.” 2. Say “Setup.”
time by pressing the SPEECH button and 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
Say the number of the device that you
saying the number, even before all of the
want to delete from the system. 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
paired numbers and device tags of corre-
If you want to delete all paired phones the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
sponding music players are read out by the
system. from the system, say “All.” Say “List.”
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice 5. The voice guide will read out device tags
guide will say “Deleting <device tag> of corresponding devices in order, starting
5. The selected music player will be con- <number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting with the Bluetooth® device that has been
nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. all devices. Is this correct?” most recently connected.
The voice guide will say “<device tag> Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). 6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-
selected” and then the system will return Answer “No,” the system will return to tooth® devices have been read, the system
to the main menu. Step 4. will say “End of list, would you like to
start from the beginning?”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


To hear the list again from the beginning, 1. Press the SPEECH button. When the change is complete, the voice
answer “Yes.” 2. Say “Setup.” guide will say “New name saved” and
When you are done, answer “No” to 3. Say “Pairing Options.” then the system will return to the main
return to the main menu. 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of menu.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
Say “Edit.”
NOTE Operating a music player con-
5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and
 If you press and release the SPEECH button
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth®
nected via Bluetooth®
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
devices and device tags of corresponding
N00565400015 5
list is being read, the system will advance or
rewind the list. devices in order, starting with the Blue- For the operation of a music player connected
Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with tooth® that has been most recently con- via Bluetooth®, refer to “To play tracks from
the next highest number or “Previous” to nected. a Bluetooth® device” on page 7-35.
return to the phone with the previous num-
After all paired device tags have been
ber.
read, the voice guide will say “Which
 You can change the device tag by pressing How to make or receive hands-
and releasing the SPEECH button and then
device, please?” Say the number of the
device tag you want to change. free calls
saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
N00565500087
 You can change the phone to be connected
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but- NOTE You can make or receive hands-free calls
ton and then saying “Select phone” while the  You can press and release the SPEECH but- using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
list is being read. ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
 You can change the music player to be con- ately say the number of the device tag you
want to change.
You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue-
nected by pressing and releasing the
SPEECH button and then saying “Select tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without
music player” while the list is being read. dialing telephone numbers.
6. The voice guide will say “New name,
please.” Say the name you want to regis- To make a call P.5-92
ter as a new device tag. Send function P.5-93
Changing a device tag When the confirmation function is on, the
N00565300014
Receiving calls P.5-93
voice guide will say “<New device tag>. Mute function P.5-93
You can change the device tag of a paired cel- Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” Switching between hands-free mode and pri-
lular phone or music player. Answer “No,” you can say the new device vate mode P.5-94
Follow the steps below to change a device tag you want to register again.
tag. 7. The deviceI otag
nfrmat
iois
nPrchanged.
ovi
dedby:


When the confirmation function is on, the
NOTE system will confirm the telephone number
NOTE
 Hands-free calls may not operate correctly  If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone-
again. To continue with that number,
when you place or receive the call directly book and the mobile phonebook are empty,
answer “Yes.”
from your cellular phone, instead of using the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone-
To change the telephone number, answer book is empty. Would you like to add a new
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
“No.” The system will say “Number entry now?”
please” then say the telephone number Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say
again.
5 To make a call
“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”
You can now create data in the vehicle
N00565600020
phonebook.
You can make a call in the following 3 ways NOTE Answer “No,” the system will return to the
 In the case of English, the system will recog- main menu.
using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
- By saying a telephone number number “0.”
- By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num- 3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”
phonebook bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *). say the name you want to call, from those
- By redialing a telephone number  The maximum supported telephone number registered in the phonebook.
length is as follows: 4. If there is only 1 match, the system will
Making a call by using the telephone • International telephone number: + and tele- proceed to Step 5.
number phone numbers (to 18 digits). If there are 2 or more matches, the voice
• Except for international telephone number: guide will say “More than one match was
You can make a call by saying the telephone
telephone numbers (to 19 digits). found, would you like to call <returned
number.
name>.” If that person is the one you want
1. Press the SPEECH button. Making a call using a phonebook to call, answer “Yes.”
2. Say “Dial.” Answer “No,” the name of the next
You can make calls using the vehicle phone- matching person will be uttered by the
3. After the voice guide says “Number
please,” say the telephone number. book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® voice guide.
4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num- 2.0 interface.
ber recognized>.” For details on the phonebooks, refer to NOTE
“Phonebook function” on page 5-94.  If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not
make the call. 1. Press the SPEECH button. found, returning to main menu” and the sys-
2. Say “Call.” tem will return to the main menu.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


5. If only 1 telephone number is registered 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name> SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound
under the name you just said, the voice <location>” and then the system will dial send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel-
guide will proceed to Step 6. the telephone number. lular phone.
If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis-
tered that match the name you just said, NOTE Receiving calls
the voice guide will say “Would you like  When the confirmation function is on, the N00565800035
to call <name> at [home], [work], system will check if the name and location of
the receiver are correct. If the name is cor- If an incoming phone call is received while
[mobile], or [other]?” Select the location
to call. rect, answer “Yes.” the ignition switch or the operation mode is in 5
To change the name or location to call, ON or ACC, the audio system will be auto-
answer “No.” The system will return to Step matically turned on and switched to the
NOTE 3. incoming call, even when the audio system
 If the name you selected has matching data
in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
was originally off.
number is registered under the selected loca- The voice guide announcement for the
Redialing incoming call will be output from the front
tion, the voice guide will say
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for You can redial the last number called, based passenger’s seat speaker.
<name>. Would you like to add location or on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- If the CD player or radio was playing when
try again?”
lular phone. the incoming call was received, the audio sys-
Say “Try again,” and the system will return tem will mute the sound from the CD player
to Step 3.
Use the following procedure to redial.
or radio and output only the incoming call.
Say “Add location” and you can register an To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
1. Press the SPEECH button.
additional telephone number under the
2. Say “Redial.” on the steering wheel control switch.
selected location.
When the call is over, the audio system will
 If the name you selected has matching data
return to its previous state.
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone Send function
number is registered under the selected loca- N00565700018
tion, the voice guide will say
During a call, press the SPEECH button to Mute function
“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for N00565900010
<name>. Would you like to try again?” enter voice recognition mode, then say
Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF At any time during a call, you can mute the
Step 3. tones. vehicle microphone.
Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled. For example, if during a call you need to sim- Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
Start over again from Step 1. ulate the pressing of a phone button as a “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute
response to an automated system, press the function and mute the microphone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from
off the mute function and cancel the mute on
NOTE the phonebook of the cellular phone.
 Disconnecting the battery cable will not
the microphone.
delete information registered in the phone-
book. To register by reading out a telephone
Switching between hands-free number
mode and private mode 1. Press the SPEECH button.
N00566600014 Vehicle phonebook 2. Say “Phonebook.”
5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch
N00566101159
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
between hands-free mode (hands-free calls) This phonebook is used when making calls the following: new entry, edit number,
and private mode (calls using cellular phone). with the voice recognition function. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
If you press the SPEECH button and say Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- import contact.” Say “New entry.”
“Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you cle phonebook per language. 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri- Also, each entry has 4 locations associated Say your preferred name to register it.
vate mode. with: home, work, mobile and other. You can
To return to hands-free mode, press the register one telephone number for each loca- NOTE
SPEECH button again and say “Transfer tion.  If the maximum number of entries are
call.” already registered, the voice guide will say
You can register a desired name as a name for “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
Phonebook function phonebook. delete a registered name.
N00566000018 Names and telephone numbers can be If you say “No,” the system will return to the
changed later on. main menu.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
unique phonebooks that are different from the The vehicle phonebook can be used with all
phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They 5. When the name has been registered, the
paired cellular phones.
are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile voice guide will say “home, work,
phonebook. To register a telephone number in the mobile, or other?” Say the location for
These phonebooks are used to register tele- vehicle phonebook which you want to register a telephone
phone numbers and make calls to desired number.
numbers via voice recognition function. You can register a telephone number in the
vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways:
Reading out a telephone number, and select-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


Answer “No” to end the registration pro-
NOTE cess and return to the main menu.
NOTE
 When the confirmation function is on, the  If telephone numbers contain characters
voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor- other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
rect?” Answer “Yes.”
NOTE are deleted before the transfer.
If a telephone number has been registered for  When the confirmation function is on, after  For the connection settings on the cellular
the selected location, the voice guide will say repeating the telephone number you have
phone side, refer to the instructions for the
“The current number is <telephone number>, read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
cellular phone.
rect?” Answer “Yes.”
number please.”
If you do not want to change the telephone Answer “No” to return to telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button.
5
number, say “cancel” or the original number registration in step 6.
2. Say “Phonebook.”
to keep it registered. 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
To select and transfer one phonebook the following: new entry, edit number,
6. The voice guide will say “Number entry from the phonebook of the cellular edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
please.” Say the telephone number to reg- phone import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
ister it. 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the to import a single entry or all contacts?”
NOTE phonebook of the cellular phone and register Say “Single entry.”
 In the case of English, the system will recog- it in the vehicle phonebook. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the ready to receive transferred phonebook
number “0.” NOTE data.
 Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone parked. Before transferring, make sure that NOTE
the vehicle is parked in a safe location.  If the maximum number of entries are
number you have just read, and then reg-
 All or part of data may not be transferred, already registered, the voice guide will say
ister the number.
even when the cellular phone supports Blue- “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
When the telephone number has been reg- delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
istered, the voice guide will say “Number delete a registered name.
the device.
saved. Would you like to add another If you say “No,” the system will return to the
 The maximum supported telephone number
number for this entry?” main menu.
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
To add another telephone number for a 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
new location for the current entry, answer 19 digits.
“Yes.” The system will return to location
selection in Step 5. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


5. After the voice guide says “Ready to Say the name you want to register for this You can also listen to the list of names regis-
receive a contact from the phone. Only a phonebook entry. tered in the vehicle phonebook.
home, a work, and a mobile number can
be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- NOTE NOTE
face will receive the phonebook data from  If the entered name is already used for other  The system must have at least one entry.
phonebook entry or similar to a name used
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot
be registered. [Editing a telephone number]
5 6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu-
lar phone to set it up so that the phone- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
book entry you want to register in the 8. The voice guide will say “Adding 2. Say “Phonebook.”
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to <name>.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. When the confirmation function is on, the the following: new entry, edit number,
system will ask if the name is correct. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
NOTE Answer “Yes.” import contact”. Say “Edit number.”
Answer “No,” the voice guide will say 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- “Name please.” Register a different name.
nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular
name of the entry you would like to edit,
9. The voice guide will say “Numbers or say list names.” Say the name of the
phone or the connection takes too much saved.”
time, the voice guide will say “Import con- phonebook entry you want to edit.
10. The voice guide will say “Would you like
tact has timed out” and then the system will
cancel the registration. In such case, start
to import another contact?” NOTE
over again from Step 1. Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
 Say “List names,” and the names registered
 Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing with the registration. You can continue to in the phonebook will be read out in order.
and holding the SPEECH button will cancel register a new phonebook entry from Step Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to
the registration. 5. the list of registered names” on page 5-98.
Answer “No,” the system will return to
7. When the reception is complete, the voice the main menu.
5. The voice guide will say “Home, work,
guide will say “<Number of telephone mobile or other?” Select and say the loca-
numbers that had been registered in the To change the content registered in the tion where the telephone number you
import source> numbers have been vehicle phonebook want to change or add is registered.
imported. What name would you like to
use for these numbers?” You can change or delete a name or telephone
number registeredInf
in
or
the
mati
vehicle
onPr
ovi
phonebook.
dedby:


When the confirmation function is on, the [Editing a name]
system will check the target name and
NOTE
 If the location where a telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button.
location again. Answer “Yes” if you want
was already registered has been overwritten 2. Say “Phonebook.”
to continue with the editing.
with a new number, the voice guide will say 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
Answer “No,” the system will return to “Number changed” and then the system will
Step 3. the following: new entry, edit number,
return to the main menu.
6. The voice guide will say “Number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
please.” Say the telephone number you import contact.” Say “Edit name.”
want to register. 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 5
name of the entry you would like to edit,
NOTE or say list names.” Say the name you want
 If the telephone number is already registered to edit.
in the selected location, the voice guide will
say “The current number is <current num- NOTE
ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele-  Say “List names,” and the names registered
phone number to change the current number. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list
of registered names” on page 5-98.
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
number.
When the confirmation function is on, the 5. The voice guide will say “Changing
system will ask if the number is correct. <name>.”
Answer “Yes.” When the confirmation function is on, the
Answer “No,” the system will return to system will check if the name is correct.
the Step 3. Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
8. Once the telephone number is registered, with the editing based on this information.
the voice guide will say “Number saved” Answer “No,” the system will return to
and then the system will return to the Step 4.
main menu. 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
Say the new name you want to register.
7. The registered name will be changed.
When the change is complete, the system
will return to the main menu.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


[Listening to the list of registered names] [Deleting a telephone number] Select the location to delete, and the voice
guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
1. Press the SPEECH button. 1. Press the SPEECH button. tion>.”
2. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Phonebook.”
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of NOTE
the following: new entry, edit number, the following: new entry, edit number,  To delete the telephone numbers from all
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or locations, say “All.”
import contact.” Say “List names.” import contact.” Say “Delete.”
5 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
6. The system will ask if you really want to
entries in the phonebook in order. name of the entry you would like to
delete the selected telephone number(s) to
5. When the voice guide is done reading the delete, or say list names.” Say the name of
go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”
list, it will say “End of list, would you like the phonebook entry in which the tele-
Answer “No,” the system will cancel
to start from the beginning?” When you phone number you want to delete is regis-
deleting the telephone number(s) and then
want to check the list again from the tered.
return to Step 4.
beginning, answer “Yes.” 7. When the telephone number deletion is
When you are done, answer “No” to NOTE complete, the voice guide will say
return to the previous or main menu.  Say “List names,” and the names registered
“<name> <location> deleted” and then
in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
the system will return to the main menu.
NOTE to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list
If all locations are deleted, the system will
of registered names” on page 5-98.
 You can call, edit or delete a name that is say “<name> and all locations deleted”
being read out. and the name will be removed from the
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to 5. If only one telephone number is registered phonebook. If numbers still remain under
call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or in the selected phonebook entry, the voice the entry, the name will retain the other
“Delete” to delete it. guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-
The system will beep and then execute your
associated numbers.
tion>.”
command.
If multiple telephone numbers are regis-
 If you press the SPEECH button and say Erasing the phonebook
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is
tered in the selected phonebook entry, the
being read, the system will advance or voice guide will say “Would you like to You can delete all registered information
rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], from the vehicle phonebook.
the next entry or “Previous” to return to the or all?”
previous entry. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


3. The voice guide will say “Select one of Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing
the following: new entry, edit number, up to 1,000 names, can be registered.
NOTE
 The already stored phonebook in the mobile
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
phonebook is overwritten by the stored
import contact.” Say “Erase all.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
phonebook in the cellular phone.
4. For confirmation purposes, the voice converts from text to voice the names regis-
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
guide will ask “Are you sure you want to tered in the transferred phonebook entries, even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
erase everything from your hands-free and creates names.
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.”
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all
the device. 5
NOTE  Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
registered information in the phonebook  Only the mobile phonebook transferred from can be imported.
and return to the main menu. the connected cellular phone can be used  The maximum supported telephone number
5. The voice guide will say “You are about with that cellular phone. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
to delete everything from your hands-free  You cannot change the names and telephone 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
system phonebook. Do you want to con- numbers in the phonebook entries registered 19 digits.
tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select  If telephone numbers contain characters
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all and delete specific phonebook entries, either. other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
registered information in the phonebook To change or delete any of the above, change are deleted before the transfer.
and return to the main menu. the applicable information in the source  For the connection settings on the cellular
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, phonebook of the cellular phone and then phone side, refer to the instructions for the
transfer the phonebook again. cellular phone.
erasing the hands-free system phone-
book” and then the system will delete all 1. Press the SPEECH button.
data in the phonebook. To import a devices phonebook
When the deletion is complete, the voice Follow the steps below to transfer to the 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
guide will say “Hands-free system phone- mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in the following: new entry, edit number,
book erased” and then the system will the cellular phone. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
return to the main menu. import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
NOTE 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
Mobile phonebook  Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
to import a single entry or all contacts?”
N00566200049
cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure Say “All contacts.”
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and
registered in the mobile phonebook. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


5. The voice guide will say “Importing the 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice The term “IC:” before the radio certification
contact list from the mobile phonebook. guide will say “Import complete” and number only signifies that Industry Canada
This may take several minutes to com- then the system will return to the main technical specifications were met.
plete. Would you like to continue?” menu. The antenna used for this transmitter must not
Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile be co-located or operating in conjunction
phonebook the phonebook stored in the with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
General information
cellular phone will start. users and installers must be provided with
N00566301092
Answer “No,” the system will return to installation instructions and transmitter oper-
5 the main menu. MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
IC: 279B-MDGMY10 compliance.
NOTE Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
 The transfer may take some time to complete radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- and found to comply with the limits for a
depending on the number of contacts. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel- Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This provide reasonable protection against harmful
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable device complies with Part 15 of the FCC interference in a residential installation.
to transfer contact list from phone” and then Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada This equipment generates, use and can radiate
the system will return to the main menu. Rules. Operation is subject to the following radio frequency energy and, if not installed
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press two conditions: and used in accordance with the instructions,
and hold the SPEECH button during the data may cause harmful interference to radio com-
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and  This device may not cause harmful inter- munications.
the system will return to the main menu. ference. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
 If an error occurs during the data transfer, all  This device must accept any interference ence will not occur in a particular installation.
transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide received, including interference that may If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
will say “Unable to complete the phonebook cause undesired operation. ence to radio or television reception, which
import” and then the system will return to
the main menu.
can be determined by turning the equipment
 If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the CAUTION off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
voice guide will say “There are no contacts  Changes or modifications made to this correct the interference by one or more of the
on the connected phone.” equipment not expressly approved by the following measures:
manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
tion to operate this equipment.  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: equipment and receiver.
USB input terminal (if so equipped)

 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
circuit different from that to which the Inc. in the United States and other countries.
receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced
How to connect a USB memory
radio/TV technician for help.
device
ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus N00566800104
complies with Canadian ICES-003.

To connect 5
Enrollment commands
N00566401080 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position 4. Connect the commercially available USB
or put the operation mode in OFF. connector cable (D) to the vehicle’s con-
2. Open the glove compartment and remove nector cable (B).
the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C). Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of
the connector cable as shown in the illus-
tration.
5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the
clips.
USB input terminal (if so

equipped)
N00566701083
You can connect your USB memory device or 3. Connect a commercially available USB
iPod* to play music files stored in the USB connector cable (D) to the USB memory
memory device or iPod. device (E).
The following explains how to connect and
remove a USB memory device or iPod.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING
 An open glove compartment door can
cause a serious injury or death to the front
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
5
NOTE
 Do not connect the USB memory device to
the vehicle’s connector cable directly. 3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and 3. Connect the Dock connector (D) to the
The USB memory device may be damaged. close the glove compartment. iPod (E).
 When closing the glove compartment, be
careful not to trap the connector cable and
USB memory device. How to connect an iPod
N00566900091
To remove To connect
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position or put the operation mode in 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
OFF. the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
2. Remove the commercially available USB or put the operation mode in OFF.
connector cable (D). 2. Open the glove compartment and remove
Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C).
NOTE
the connector cable as shown in the illus-
 Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple
tration.
Inc.
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi
Entertainment System (MMES), refer to the
separate “Mitsubishi Multi Entertainment
System owner’s manual” for details of con-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
nection.


4. Connect the Dock connector (D) to the
To remove Types of connectable devices
connector cable (B).
Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
and supported file specifica-
the connector cable as shown in the illus- position or put the operation mode in tions
tration. OFF. N00567001067
5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the 2. Remove the Dock connector (D).
clips. For vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi
Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of Multi Entertainment System (MMES)
the connector cable as shown in the illus- 5
tration. For details about the types of connectable
devices and supported file specifications,
refer to the separate owner's manual.
Except for vehicles equipped with Mit-

subishi Multi Entertainment System
(MMES)
For details about the types of connectable

devices and supported file specifications,
refer to the following section.
WARNING
cause a serious injury or death to the front 3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and Device types
passenger in an accident, even if the pas- close the glove compartment. N00567101143
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always Devices of the following types can be con-
nected.
when driving.
Model name Condition

NOTE Storage capacity of
 When closing the glove compartment, be USB memory device 256 Mbytes or
careful not to trap the connector cable and more
iPod. fifth gen- F/W Ver.1.3 or
iPod*
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: eration later


Model name Condition Model name Condition http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
ucts/index.html
80GB/180 F/W Ver.1.1.2 or F/W Ver.3.1.3 or
iPhone
GB later later *: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod
iPod clas- F/W Ver.2.0.1 or F/W Ver.4.2.1 or touch” and “iPhone” are registered trade-
120GB iPhone 3G marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and
sic* later later
other countries.
160GB F/W Ver.2.0.4 or iPhone F/W Ver.4.3.1 or
iPhone*
5 (late 2009) later 3GS later
NOTE
first gener- F/W Ver.1.3.1 or F/W Ver.4.3.1 or
iPhone 4  Depending on the type of the USB memory
ation later later
device or other device connected, the con-
second F/W Ver.1.1.3 or F/W Ver.5.0.1 or nected device may not function properly or
iPhone 4S
generation later later the available functions may be limited.
Models other than Digital audio  It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-
third gen- F/W Ver.1.1.3 or
ware updated to the latest version.
iPod eration later USB memory devices player supporting
 You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
nano* fourth F/W Ver.1.0.4 or and iPods mass storage class
the USB input terminal when the ignition
generation later switch or the operation mode is in ON or
On vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth® ACC.
fifth gen- F/W Ver.1.0.2 or
2.0 interface, for these connectable device  Do not keep your USB memory device or
eration later
types, “iPod*,” “iPod classic*,” “iPod iPod in your vehicle.
sixth gen- F/W Ver.1.0 or nano*,” “iPod touch*” and “iPhone*,” refer  It is recommended that you back up the files
eration later to the following website: in case of data damage.
first gener- F/W Ver.3.1.3 or [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]  Do not connect to the USB input terminal
ation later You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
America website. reader, etc.) other than the connectable
second F/W Ver.4.2.1 or devices specified in the previous section.
[For vehicles sold in Canada]
iPod generation later The device and/or data may be damaged. If
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
touch* any of these devices was connected by mis-
third gen- F/W Ver.4.3.1 or site. Please read and agree to the “Warning take, remove it after turning the ignition
eration later about Links to the Web Sites of Other Com- switch to the “OFF” position or putting the
fourth F/W Ver.4.3.1 or panies”. The websites mentioned above may operation mode in OFF.
generation later connect you to websites other than the Mit-
subishi Motors website.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Sun visors
File specifications Sun visors

N00567200020
N00524600353
You can play music files of the following Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce
specifications that are saved in a USB mem- front glare while driving. To reduce side
ory device or other device supporting mass glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
storage class. When you connect your iPod,
playable file specifications depend on the
connected iPod. 5
Item Condition
File format MP3, WMA, AAC
Maximum number of Card holder
levels (including the Level 8
root) Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on
Number of folders 700 the sun visor.
Number of files 65,535
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun

visor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

12 V power outlets
12 V power outlets Interior lights Dome light

N00525000615 N00525300575 N00525800235
CAUTION NOTE
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less. with the engine off may run the battery
 Also be aware that using electronic equip- down.
5 ment with the engine off may run the battery Never leave the vehicle without checking
down. that the light is off.
 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure
to close the power outlet cover. This will pre-
vent the power outlet from becoming
clogged and short circuiting.
Accessories can be operated while the igni- 1- ( )

tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or The light illuminates regardless of
ACC. whether a door or the liftgate is open or
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the closed.
cover, and insert the plug in the power outlet. 2- (•)
Delayed off function
The light illuminates when a door or the
1- Cargo room light  P.5-107 liftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-
2- Dome light  P.5-106 mately 30 seconds after the door or lift-
gate is closed.
However, the light goes off immediately
with all doors and the liftgate closed in the
following cases:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is
put in ON.
• When the power door lock function is
used to lock the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Storage spaces
• When the remote control transmitter of The light illuminates when the liftgate is
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
NOTE opened, and goes out when the liftgate is
 When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
key is used to lock the vehicle. closed.
engine: if the operation mode is put in OFF
• When the door lock/unlock switch or
while the doors and liftgate are closed, the
liftgate switch is pressed to lock the
vehicle while carrying the F.A.S.T.-key.
light illuminates and after approximately 30 Storage spaces
seconds it goes off. N00526400528
Auto cut-out function  The time until the light goes off (delayed off)
If the light is left switched on with the
ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC”
can be adjusted. See your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
CAUTION 5
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
position or the operation mode is in OFF  The auto cut-out function cannot be operated or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
or ACC, and a door or the liftgate is when the dome light switch is in the “ ” vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
opened, it goes off automatically after position. become extremely hot, so lighters and other
approximately 30 minutes. Also, this function can be deactivated. See flammable items may catch fire and
The light will illuminate again after it your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
automatically goes off in the following details. may rupture. The heat may also deform or
cases: crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
• When the ignition switch is turned to the 3- ( ) tacle parts that are made of plastic.
“ON” position or the operation mode is  Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
The light goes off regardless of whether a
put in ON. driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
door or the liftgate is open or closed.
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
• When the keyless entry system or the
during a sudden stop.
F.A.S.T.-key is operated.
• When all doors and the liftgate are Cargo room light
N00526100176
closed.
NOTE
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space
NOTE when leaving the vehicle.
 When the key was used to start the engine: if
the key is removed while the doors and lift-
gate are closed, the light is illuminated and
after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Cup holders
Glove compartment Cup holders CAUTION

N00551500275 N00527301433  Do not drink beverages while driving your
vehicle.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups
WARNING This is distracting and could cause an acci-
or drink-cans securely in its holes. dent.
cause a serious injury or death to the front
passenger in an accident, even if the pas- NOTE
5 senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
 Plastic bottles may sometimes not fit For the rear seat
securely depending on the shape of the bot- N00537000175
when driving. tle. Plastic bottles could fall if driving is
done while a plastic bottle is not securely
To open, pull the lever (A). placed, so check that plastic bottles are
placed securely or use the bottle holder.
For the front seat
The cup holder is located in front of the floor

console.
Bottle holders
N00502800065
NOTE CAUTION
 The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is
 Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
located in the glove compartment. For
is distracting and can cause an accident.
details, refer to “USB input terminal” on
 Vibration and shaking while driving may
page 5-101.
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)

There are bottle holders located on the front
doors. Rear shelf panel (if so equipped) CAUTION
N00528200096  Lightly push the rear shelf panel to make
sure that the concave portion (A) is set
firmly in the protruding portion (B) of the
CAUTION liftgate. If the rear shelf panel is not securely
 Do not place luggage or other items on the locked in place, it could unhook while driv-
rear shelf panel. Any items on the rear shelf ing and cause injuries.
panel would obstruct your rearward view,
and they could fly forward and cause injuries 5
or other mishap in the event of hard braking. 2. Hang the strap (C) of the rear shelf panel
on the hook (D).
To install
1. Insert the concave portion (A) on the
NOTE underside of the rear shelf panel into the
 Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle inside protruding portion (B) of the rear
holder. pillar.
 Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc.
 Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
tles, etc.
To remove
Follow this procedure in reverse to remove.
Convenience hook
N00574700014
Convenience hook is located on the seatback

of the passenger’s seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Assist grips
NOTE CAUTION
 To avoid damage to the convenience hook,  Do not use the assist grips when getting into
do not hang objects that weight more than 9 or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
pounds (4 kg). detach causing you to fall.
Assist grips
N00559000074
These grips are to support the body by hand

while seated in the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Driving safety
Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 6
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-5
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fuel economy
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
N00628800178 N00628900049
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents. tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
nificant effect on your fuel consumption. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired from moving forward and possibly interfering
Several recommendations for achieving the even with blood alcohol levels far below the with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
greatest fuel economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking, genuine floor mats are recommended.
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
 Whenever accelerating from a stop,
6 always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
To install the floor mat
 When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
N00628700047
not idle the engine. Shut it off. 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary floorboard.
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
stops. 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- holes over the retaining clips.
pharmacist before driving while under the
mended pressures. 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
influence of any of these medications.
 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
WARNING
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
safely permit.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
lubricated according to the recommenda- impaired.
tions in this manual.
 Always keep your vehicle well main-
tained. A poorly maintained engine
wastes fuel and costs money. Floor mat
 Never overload your vehicle. N00628600046
The original equipment floor mat provided

with your vehicle was specifically designed NOTE
for your vehicle. Always properly position  The shape of the mat and the number of
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere retaining clips may vary depending on the
with operation ofInthe
f
ormapedals.
t
ionPr
ovi Always
dedby: use the vehicle model.
6-2 Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
WARNING possible, while keeping good visibility,
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
and good control of the steering wheel,
properly installed, it can interfere with the
brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check
operation of the pedals. Interference with
the pedals can cause unintended accelera- the instrument panel indicators and multi-
tion and/or increased stopping distances information display for any possible prob-
resulting in a crash and injury. Always lem.
make sure the floor mat does not interfere  Similarly, the front passenger seat should
with the accelerator or brake pedal. also be moved as far back as possible.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
 Make sure that infants and small children 6
are properly restrained in accordance with
mat. all laws and regulations.
 Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down. Vehicle preparation before
 Never install a second mat over or under Defrosters
an existing floor mat.
driving
N00629000702
 Do not use a floor mat designed for Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
another model vehicle even if it is a For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always and set the blower switch on high. You should
Mitsubishi genuine floor mat. check for the following: be able to feel the air blowing against the
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol- windshield.
lowing:
• Periodically check that the floor mat is
Seat belts and seats Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door windows)” on page 7-10, 7-16.
properly secured with the retaining clips.
 Before starting the vehicle, make certain
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
that you and all passengers are seated and
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
wearing their seat belts properly (with
Tires
other reason, always check the condition
of the floor mat after it has been rein- children in the rear seat, in appropriate
stalled. restraints), and that all the doors and the Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
• While the vehicle is stopped with the liftgate are locked. uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,
engine off, check that the floor mat is not glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look
interfering with the pedals by depressing for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
the pedals fully. the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
(including spare tire) for proper pressure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving safety 6-3

Safe driving techniques

Replace your tires before they are heavily you give extra attention to the following Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
worn out. areas, you can better protect yourself and the engine runs at the proper speed and if
On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure your passengers: the headlights are as bright as normally.
monitoring system, there is a risk of damage Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
to the tire inflation pressure sensors when the  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
tire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacement road and weather conditions. Leave plenty ble that a very low battery could freeze.
should, only be performed by an authorized of stopping distance between your vehicle
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. and the vehicle ahead. WARNING
 Before changing lanes, check your mir-  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
rors, your blind spots, and use your turn-
6 Lights signal light.
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
tery to explode, which could cause serious
 While driving, watch the behavior of injury or death.
Have someone watch while you turn all the other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. Always wear protective clothes and a face
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn  Always obey applicable laws and regula- mask when working with your battery, or
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always let a skilled mechanic do it.
the instrument panel. leave room for unexpected events, such as
sudden braking.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
Fluid leaks  If you plan to drive in another country, ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
obey their vehicle registration laws and time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
make sure you will be able to get the right drive your vehicle slowly.
Check the ground under the vehicle after fuel.  Stay at low speeds at first so that the man-
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or ual transaxle oil or the automatic transaxle
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are fluid has time to spread to all the lubrica-
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need Driving during cold weather tion points.
to find out why immediately and have it N00629400474
 Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in
fixed.  Check the battery. At the same time,
cold weather conditions. This is normal
check the terminals and wiring. During
and shifting will get easier as the transaxle
extremely cold weather, the battery will
Safe driving techniques not be as strong. Also, the battery power
warms up.
 Check the engine antifreeze.
N00629200137
level may drop because more power is
If there is not enough coolant because of a
Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and used for cold starting and driving.
leak or from engine overheating, add
your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: Life Coolant Premium or equivalent.
6-4 Driving safety
Braking
Please read this section in conjunction
When driving in cold weather For vehicles equipped with man-
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
ual transaxle
WARNING On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking
 Never open the radiator cap when the system, making the brakes less effective. Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
radiator is hot. You could be seriously While driving in such conditions, pay close (Reverse) position when parking on a down-
burned. attention to surrounding vehicles and to the hill slope, into the 1st position when parking
condition of the road surface. From time to on an uphill slope.
time, lightly depress the brake pedal and
Braking check how effective the brakes are. For vehicles equipped with contin- 6
N00629500521 uously variable transmission
All parts of the brake system are critical to When driving downhill (CVT)
safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair It is important to take advantage of the engine Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
facility of your choice at regular intervals braking by downshifting while driving on when parked and that the selector lever is in
according to the “WARRANTY AND steep downhill roads in order to prevent the the “P” (PARK) position.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. brakes from overheating. When parking on a hill, it is important to set
the parking brake before moving the selector
When brakes are wet Parking lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
N00629600333
vents loading the parking brake against the
Check the brake system while driving at a transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to
move the selector lever out of the “P”
low speed immediately after starting, espe- Parking on a hill (PARK) position.
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
they work normally.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
A film of water can be formed on the brake
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a Parking with the engine run-
discs or brake drums, and prevent normal ning
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
braking after driving in heavy rain or through
If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed.
If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving Never leave the engine running while you
slowly while lightly depressing the brake take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the
pedal. engine running in a closed or poorly venti-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: lated place.
Driving safety 6-5
Loading information
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load
WARNING When leaving the vehicle on an individual tire that is determined by
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or
distributing to each axle its share of the
death from accidentally moving the gear- Always carry the key and lock all doors and maximum loaded vehicle weight and
shift lever (manual transaxle) or the selec-
the liftgate when leaving the vehicle unat- dividing by two.
tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulation
tended.  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an
of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger
compartment. Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit individual tire that is determined by dis-
area. tributing to each axle its share of the curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal
6 Where you park Loading information occupant weight and dividing by two.
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum
N00629900424
of -
Your front bumper can be damaged if you It is very important to know how much (a) Curb weight;
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is (b) Accessory weight;
Be careful when traveling up or down steep called the vehicle capacity weight and (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and
slopes where your bumper can scrape the includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, (d) Production options weight.
road. non-factory-installed options, if any, being  Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-
towed. The tire and loading information plac- cle with standard equipment including the
WARNING ard located on the driver’s door sill of your maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where vehicle will show how much weight it may ant.
combustible materials such as dry grass or properly carry.  Accessory weight: the combined weight
leaves can come in contact with a hot (in excess of those standard items which
exhaust, since a fire could occur. WARNING may be replaced) of automatic transmis-
 Never overload your vehicle. Overloading sion, power steering, power brakes, power
can damage your vehicle, adversely affect windows, power seats, radio, and heater,
Do not keep the steering wheel vehicle performance, including handling to the extent that these items are available
fully turned for a long time and braking, cause tire failure, and result as factory- installed equipment (whether
in an accident. installed or not).
 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
More effort could be required to turn the
It is important to familiarize yourself with the and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*
steering wheel.
following terms before loading your vehicle: times the vehicle’s designated seating
Refer to “Electric power steering system
capacity.
(EPS)” on page 5-48. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
 Production options weight: the combined
weight of those installed regular produc-
tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
in excess of those standard items which
they replace, not previously considered in
curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
 Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)*
times the number of specified occupants. 6
(In your vehicle the number is 3)
 Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu- This placard shows the maximum number of
tion within the passenger compartment (In occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, well as “the combined weight of occupants
1 in second row seat) and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
*: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per- capacity weight. This placard also tells you
son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian the size and recommended inflation pressure
regulations. for the original equipment tires on your vehi-
cle. For more information, refer to “Tires” on
page 9-12.
Tire and loading information

placard
N00630100396
The tire and loading information placard is

located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201277
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
NOTE
4. The resulting figure equals the
 The above steps for determining
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam- correct load limit were written in
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals accordance with U.S.A. regula-
1400 lbs. and there will be five tions.
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi- Your vehicle cannot tow a
cle, the amount of available cargo trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size
of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information
on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of this manual.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING Trailer towing

N00629700435  To reduce the risk of serious injury or N00629800306
death, the combined weights of the driver,
passengers and cargo and must never
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
N00630300082
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance,
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident.
6 For additional information, if needed, refer to  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
on page 6-8. cargo or luggage cannot move when your
vehicle is in motion.
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin
listed on the safety certification label (A) if you suddenly have to brake can cause a WARNING
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door serious accident or injury or death.  Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of It may not be possible to maintain control
weight. your vehicle. Try to spread the weight or adequate braking.
evenly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-10 Driving safety

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) ...............7-4
Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) .........................................7-7
Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)...................................7-11
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-17
Air purifier (if so equipped)............................................................7-18
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player
7
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-18
To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) ..........................7-27
To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device
(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) ...................................7-35
Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) .....7-37
Error codes .....................................................................................7-38
Handling of compact discs .............................................................7-40
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-41
General information about your radio ...........................................7-42
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vents
Vents
N00729900278
*
1- Open
7 2- Close
*
Side vents
*: Optional equipment
1- Center vents
When the dimple (A) is pressed, the vents NOTE
2- Side vents  On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
open.
To close the vents, press the dimple on the air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
opposite side.
Air flow and direction adjust- Change the direction of the air flow by turn-
indicate a problem.
ments  Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
ing the vent itself. vents as they could prevent the air condition-
N00730200330
ing from operating normally.
Center vents
Changing the mode selection
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments. N00736400594
To change the position and amount of air

flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-
tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on
page 7-5, 7-7.
On vehicles with the automatic air condition-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: ing, press the MODE switch or defogger
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on page
7-13, “Defogger switch” on page 7-13.)
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
7
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen- NOTE
 With the mode selection dial between the Foot/Defroster position
ger compartment.
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the upper part of the passenger compart- Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
ment. With the mode selection dial between the door windows.
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
Foot/Face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Comfort controls 7-3

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped)
NOTE Heater without air condi- Blower speed selection dial

 With the mode selection dial between the
tioning function (if so equipped) N00737900033
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
N00737700031
to the leg area. With the mode selection dial tion, select the blower speed by turning the
between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air The heater can only be used while the engine blower speed selection dial.
flows mainly to the windshield and the door is running. Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
windows. blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
Defroster position Control panel will stop.
N00737800032
7
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
door windows.
1- Temperature control lever

2- Air selection lever
3- Mode selection dial Temperature control lever
4- Electric rear window defogger switch N00738000057
 P. 5-80
The temperature control lever is used to select
5- Blower speed selection dial
the desired air temperature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Air selection lever CAUTION

N00738200046  Using recirculated air for a long time may
Normally, use the outside air position to keep cause the windows to fog up.
the windshield and side windows clear and to
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield. Operating the system
N00738300047
To change the air selection, use the air selec-
tion lever. Heating
1- Cooler “ ” Outside air
2- Warmer “ ” Recirculated air Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi- 7
tion and set the air selection lever to the out-
side air position.
Mode selection dial Set the temperature control lever to the
N00738100061
desired temperature. Select the desired
blower speed to fit your needs.
To change the amount of air flowing from the
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in

some way, use the recirculation position.
Switch to the outside air position every now
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air
NOTE Defrosting or defogging (wind-
position.
 For quick heating, set the blower speed at the shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
3rd position. N00738500081
ing the blower speed selection dial.
4. Select your desired temperature by setting
CAUTION
the temperature control lever.
Combination of unheated air and  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
heated air through all the windows.
For quick defrosting
N00738400035
Set the mode selection dial to the positions Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
shown in the illustration and set the air selec- and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
7 tion lever to the outside air position. windshield and door window.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area For ordinary defrosting
and the upper part of the passenger compart-
ment. Set the desired blower speed. Use this setting to keep the windshield and
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
or slightly warm air (depending upon the leg area heated (when driving in rain or
position of the temperature control lever) snow).
flows to the upper part of the passenger com-
partment. 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.
position.
3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
NOTE
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)
Manual air conditioning (if so Blower speed selection dial

N00736500205
equipped)
When the ignition switch or the operation
N00730300344
mode is in ON, select the blower speed by
The air conditioning can only be used while turning the blower speed selection dial.
the engine is running. Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
Control panel the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
N00730500304
will stop.
1- Cooler
2- Warmer
7
NOTE
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
lever.
1- Temperature control lever

2- Air selection lever
Mode selection dial
3- Mode selection dial
N00736700223
4- Electric rear window defogger Temperature control lever
switch P.5-80 To change the amount of air flowing from the
N00736600248
5- Air conditioning switch vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
The temperature control lever is used to select “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
6- Blower speed selection dial
the desired air temperature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

7 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in Push the switch again and the air condition-
Air selection lever some way, use the recirculation position. ing compressor will stop and the indicator
N00736800413
Switch to the outside air position every now light (A) goes off.
and then to keep the windows from fogging
Normally, use the outside air position to keep
up. CAUTION
the windshield and side windows clear and to
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-  Using the air conditioning slightly increases
shield. CAUTION the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure
 Using recirculated air for a long time may your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when
To change the air selection, use the air selec- cause the windows to fog up. shifting the transaxle into drive.
tion lever.
“ ” Outside air Air conditioning switch Operating the air conditioning

“ ” Recirculated air N00731000478 system
Push the switch, and the air conditioning N00731100264
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning

indicator light (A) will come on. Heating
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-

tion and set the air selection lever to the out-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
side air position.


Set the temperature control lever to the
Cooling Combination of unheated air and
desired temperature. Select the desired
blower speed to fit your needs.
N00731200340 heated air
N00731300282
Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec-
tion lever to the outside air position.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area

and the upper part of the passenger compart-
ment. Set the desired blower speed.
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated
or slightly warm air (depending upon the 7
position of the temperature control lever)
flows to the upper part of the passenger com-
partment.
position.
NOTE 2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air
 For quick heating, set the blower speed at the position.
3rd position. 3. Push the air conditioning switch.
4. Change the temperature by setting the
temperature control lever.
5. Set the desired blower speed.
NOTE
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, set the air selection lever to the
recirculation position. Let in some outside
air from time to time for good ventilation.
 To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection
dial to the “ ” position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


Defrosting or defogging (wind- NOTE
position.
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-  When defrosting, do not set the temperature
N00731400560 control dial near the maximum cool position.
ing the blower speed selection dial.
This would blow cool air on the window
4. Select your desired temperature by setting
CAUTION glass and fog it up.
the temperature control lever.
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
5. Push the air conditioning switch.
For quick defrosting

Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
7 windshield and door window.
For ordinary defrosting
Use this setting to keep the windshield and

door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).

position.
position.
3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
5. Push the air conditioning switch.
NOTE
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
position. side vents toward
Inf
orthe
mat
i door
onProvi
dwindows.
edby:

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

N00731500301
The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.
Control panel
N00711801624
Type 1
Type 2
1- Temperature control switch 9- OFF switch

10- Temperature display
NOTE
2- Air conditioning switch  There is an interior air temperature sensor
3- MODE switch 11- Mode selection display
(A) in the illustrated position.
4- Air selection switch 12- Air selection indicator Never place anything over the sensor, since
5- Blower speed selection switch 13- Air conditioning indicator doing so will prevent it from functioning
6- Defogger switch 14- AUTO indicator properly.
7- AUTO switch 15- Blower speed display
8- Electric rear window defogger switch
 P.5-80 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE NOTE
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
switch.
To prevent the windshield and windows from
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to
“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced.
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
 A sound will be made every time you push the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
1- Increase
7 any of the switches.
2- Decrease
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Blower speed selection switch • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
N00736900179
Temperature control switch Outside air will be introduced and the air
Press of the blower speed selection N00737000324 conditioning will stop.
switch to increase the blower speed. If the air selection and the air conditioning
Press or of the temperature control are operated manually after an automatic
Press of the blower speed selection switch to the desired temperature. changeover, manual operation will be
switch to decrease the blower speed. The selected temperature will be shown in the selected.
The selected blower speed will be shown in display (A). • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
the display (A). to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate.
The above indicates the factory settings. You

can personalize the air selection switch and
air conditioning switch to match your per-
sonal preferences.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
Defogger switch Air selection switch
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
N00703400015 N00737200368
page7-15.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection When this switch is pressed, the mode Normally, use the outside air position to keep
(Changing the function setting)” on changes to the “ ” mode. The indicator the windshield and side windows clear and to
page7-14. light (A) will come on. The selected mode is quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shown in the display (B). Refer to “Changing shield.
the mode selection” on page 7-2.
MODE switch To change the air selection, simply press the
N00737100208 air selection switch.
To change the amount of air flowing from the The selected position will be shown in the
display (A).
vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the
MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes
7
to the next one in the following sequence:  Outside air: “ ” indicator is ON
“ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
The selected mode is shown in the display ger compartment.
(A). Refer to “Changing the mode selection”  Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ON
on page 7-2. Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
conditioning system automatically operates
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
air) is selected.
Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door windows)” on page 7-16.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: selection is controlled automatically. When

the air conditioning turns off, the air selection  Disable automatic air control:
Air conditioning switch
automatically goes back to the outside air Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,
N00737300343
position. the air selection switch will not be auto-
If high cooling performance is desired, or if matically controlled. Push the switch, and the air conditioning
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator
some way, use the recirculation position.  Changing the settings will be shown in the display (A).
Switch to the outside air position every now Press the air selection switch for about 10
and then to keep the windows from fogging seconds or longer.
up. When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the “ ” indicator will
CAUTION flash.
7  Using recirculated air for a long time may
• When the setting has changed from
cause the windows to fog up. enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
indicator will flash three times.
NOTE • When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
 If you press the AUTO switch to select auto-
matic control after manual operation, the air the system will beep two times and the
selection switch will also be automatically indicator will flash three times. Push the switch again and the air condition-
controlled. ing compressor will stop and the indicator
goes off.
NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
Personalizing the air selection control”. CAUTION
(Changing the function setting)  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air  Using the air conditioning slightly increases
N00760000089 selection will automatically change to the the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure
outside air position, even if the system is set your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when
You can change the following functions to shifting the transaxle into drive.
to “Disable automatic air control”, in order
match your preference.
to prevent windows from fogging up.
 Enable automatic air control:
When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air
selection switch will also be automatically
controlled. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


the system will beep two times and the
Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function set-
ting)
N00759800090
NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
You can change the following functions to conditioning control”.
match your preference.  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
conditioning will run automatically, even if
 Enable automatic air conditioning control:
the system is set to “Disable automatic air
When the AUTO switch is pressed, or conditioning control”, in order to prevent
when the temperature control switch has windows from fogging up.
been set to the minimum temperature, the 7
air conditioning switch is automatically
controlled. OFF switch
AUTO switch N00703600017
N00703500016
 Disable automatic air conditioning con- Push the switch to turn off the air condition-
trol: When the AUTO switch is pressed, the mode
ing system.
The air conditioning switch is not auto- selection, blower speed adjustment, recircu-
matically controlled, unless the air condi- lated/outside air selection, temperature
tioning switch is used. adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF sta-
tus are all controlled automatically.
 Changing the settings The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in the
Press the air conditioning switch for about display (A).
10 seconds or longer.
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the “ ” indicator will
flash.
• When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled, I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


leg area heated (when driving in rain or
Operating the air conditioning Operating the air conditioning snow).
system (automatic mode) system (manual mode)
N00731700361 N00731800115
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection switch and the MODE switch to the
desired positions. To return to automatic
operation, press the AUTO switch.
Defrosting or defogging (wind-

7 shield, door windows)
N00732400466
1. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-

CAUTION tion.
In normal conditions, use the system in the
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view 2. Set the air selection switch to the outside
AUTO mode and follow these procedures: through all the windows. air position.
1. Push the AUTO switch. 3. Select your desired blower speed by
2. Set the temperature control switch to the To remove frost or mist from the windshield pressing the blower speed selection
desired temperature. The temperature can and door windows, use the MODE switch or switch.
be set within a range of around 61 to 89 defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”). 4. Select your desired temperature by press-
(Type 1) or 17 to 31 (Type 2). ing the temperature control switch.
For ordinary defrosting 5. Push the air conditioning switch.
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
speed, temperature adjustment and ON/OFF
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
of air conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically.
NOTE
 Set the temperature at about 75 (Type 1) or
24 (Type 2) under normal conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Important air conditioning operating tips

For quick defrosting Have the system inspected by your authorized
Important air conditioning Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
operating tips of your choice.
N00733700336
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever CAUTION

possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the  The air conditioning system in your vehicle
vehicle interior extremely hot which then must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-
requires more time to cool. If it is neces- 134a and the lubricant ZXL 200PG.
sary to park in the sun, open the windows Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
for the first few minutes of air condition- cause severe damage and may require replac-
ing to expel the hot air. ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed system. 7
1. Push the defogger switch to change to the when the air conditioning is in use. The The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
“ ” position. sphere is not recommended.
entry of outside air through open windows
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi-
will reduce cooling efficiency.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone
3. When running the air conditioning, make layer. However, it may contribute slightly to
tion. sure the air intake, which is located in global warming.
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc- It is recommended that the old refrigerant be
NOTE tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in saved and recycled for future use.
 While the mode selection is set “ ” posi-
the air-intake chamber may reduce air
tion, the air conditioning compressor will run flow and plug the water drains.
automatically. The outside air position will During a long period of disuse
also be selected automatically. Air conditioning system refrig-
 If the mode selection is set “ ” position,
you cannot turn the air conditioning off or
erant and lubricant recommen- The air conditioning should be operated for at
least five minutes each week, even in cold
select the recirculation position. This pre- dations weather. This includes the quick defrosting
vents the windows from fogging up.
mode. Operating the air condition system
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the If the air conditioning seems less effective
side vents toward the door windows. weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
leak. in the best operating condition.
to the maximum cool position. This will
blow cool air on the window glass and fog it
up. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Air purifier (if so equipped)
Air purifier (if so equipped) NOTE Volume and tone control panel
N00733800180  To listen to the audio system while the N00711900729
engine is not running, turn the ignition

The air conditioning system is equipped with switch to the “ACC” position or put the oper-
an air filter to remove pollen and dust. ation mode in ACC.
The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace if the operation mode is left in ACC, the
it periodically. For the maintenance interval, accessory power will automatically turn off
after a certain period of time and you will no
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
longer be able to use the audio system. The
NANCE MANUAL”. accessory power comes on again if the
7 engine switch is operated with it in the
NOTE “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-
 Operation in certain conditions such as driv- cutout function” on page 5-14.
1- PWR (On-Off) switch
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
it may create noise in the audio equipment. 2- VOL (Volume control) knob
air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-
This does not mean that anything is wrong 3- Display
vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
air flow is lower than normal or when the with your audio equipment. In such a case, 4- /MENU (Mode change) button
windshield or windows start to fog up easily, use the cellular phone at a place as far away 5- Sound control button
replace the air filter. as possible from the audio equipment.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a  If foreign objects or water get into the audio
repair facility of your choice for assistance. equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor
comes from it, immediately turn off the
To adjust the volume
N00712000411
audio system and have it checked at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Turn the VOL knob clockwise to increase the
AM/FM electronically tuned repair facility of your choice. Never try to volume; counterclockwise to decrease the
radio with CD player (if so repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys- volume.
tem until it is inspected by a qualified per- The status will be displayed in the display.
equipped) son.
N00734302131  If the audio system is damaged by foreign
objects, water, or fire, have the system
The audio system can only be used when the checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors
ignition switch or the operation mode is in technician.
ON or ACC.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
To adjust the tone BALANCE (Left/Right balance Radio control panel and display
N00712100685 control) N00734900915
Press the /MENU button to select BASS

 TREBLE  FADER  BALANCE  Press the sound control button either or
Sound control mode off. to balance the volume of sound from the
left and the right speakers.
BASS (Bass tone control)
NOTE
Press the sound control button either or  The sound control mode will be canceled
to select the desired bass level.
when the another mode is selected or no
adjustment is performed for more than 10
7
seconds.
TREBLE (Treble tone control)  In a two-speakers vehicle, keep the FADER 1- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button
setting in the middle position. Since no rear 2- PWR (On-Off) switch
speakers are connected, adjusting the 3- Display
Press the sound control button either or FADER setting toward the “REAR” side will 4- Seek (Down-seek) button
to select the desired treble level. result in a loss of sound output. 5- Seek (Up-seek) button
6- Memory select buttons
FADER (Front/Rear balance con-
trol) (if equipped with rear speak-
ers) To listen to the radio
N00735000926
1. Press the PWR switch or the RADIO but-

Press the sound control button either or ton to turn on the radio.
to balance the volume of sound from the Press and hold the PWR switch for 2 sec-
front and the rear speakers. onds or longer to turn off the radio.
2. Press the RADIO button to select the
desired band (AM/FM1/FM2).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


3. Press the seek button to tune to a station, 1. Press the seek button to tune to the fre- 7- FOLDER indicator
or press one of the memory select buttons quency you wish to keep in the memory. 8- TRACK indicator
to tune in to a station memorized for that 2. Press one of the memory select buttons 9- Display
button. until it beeps. 10- RPT (Repeat)/F-RPT (Folder repeat
Refer to “Automatic tuning”, “Manual The sound will be momentarily inter- mode) indicator
tuning” or “To enter frequencies into the rupted while the frequency is being 11- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder
memory”. entered into the memory. The number of random mode) indicator
the button matching the entry in the mem- 12- SEL (Select) indicator
To tune the radio ory as well as the frequency is displayed. 13- PAGE (Title scroll) button
3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by 14- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button
pressing the button and then releasing it
15- (Fast-forward/Track up) button
7 Manual tuning within 1 second.
16- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch
The frequency changes every time the seek 17- RPT (Repeat) button
button is pressed. Press the button to select CD control panel and display 18- RDM (Random) button
the desired station. N00735300756
To listen to a CD
Automatic tuning N00735501087
After keeping the seek button depressed until

To set a disc
it beeps, release the button, and the selected
station reception will start. 1. Insert the disc with the label facing up.
When a disc is inserted, the CD indicator
To enter frequencies into the mem- will come on and the CD player will begin
ory playing even if the radio is being used.
The CD player will also start playback
1- CD (CD mode changeover) button when the CD button is pressed with a disc
As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be
2- RADIO button in the player or with a disc set in the Disc-
entered into the memory.
loading slot, even if the radio is being
3- DISP (Display)/ (Return) button
To store a frequency in the memory, follow used.
4- CD eject button
these steps: 5- CD indicator
6- Disc-loading slot
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


2. To stop the CD, turn off the power by mode and start playback. The track number
pressing the PWR switch for 2 seconds or and the playing time will appear on the dis-
NOTE
 While listening to a disc on which CD-DA
longer, or change over to the radio mode play. The tracks in the disc will be played
(CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both
by pressing the RADIO button, or eject continuously.
been recorded, you can switch between read-
the disc by pressing the eject button. ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,
To listen to an MP3 CD and the external audio input mode by press-
NOTE ing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer
(until you hear a beep).
 For information on adjusting the volume and This CD player allows you to play MP3 For information on the external audio input,
tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on refer to “To use the external audio input
7-18 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-19. CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and function” on page 7-26.
 3 inches (8 cm) compact disc cannot be
played on this CD player.
CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level
1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each
 With a disc that contains both CD-DA and 7
MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automati-
 For information concerning the handling of disc can hold up to 255 files in up to 100 fold- cally played first.
compact discs, refer to “Handling of com-
ers, up to a maximum of 16 levels. The ID3  The playback sound quality differs depend-
pact discs” on page 7-40.
tag information can be displayed during MP3 ing on the encoding software and the bit rate.
playback. For information concerning ID3 For details, refer to the user manual of your
tags, refer to “CD text and MP3 title display” encoding software.
To eject a disc on page 7-23.  Depending on file/folder configurations on a
disc, it may take some time before playback
When the CD eject button is pressed, the disc 1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the starts.
automatically stops and is ejected. slot.  MP3 encode software and writing software
2. Press the CD button if a disc is already in are not supplied with this unit.
the CD player.  You may encounter trouble in playing an
NOTE MP3 or displaying the information of MP3
 If you do not remove the disc before 15 sec-
The display shows “READING”, then
files recorded with certain writing software
onds have elapsed, the CD player will auto- playback will begin.
or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
matically reload the disc and stop.  If you record too many folders or files other
than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time
before playback starts.
To listen to a music CD  This unit does not record MP3 files.
 For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to
Press the CD button if a disc is already in the “Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 7-41.
CD player. The CD player will enter CD I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

CAUTION To fast-forward/reverse the disc To find a file (MP3 CDs only)

 Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 for-
mat which has the “.mp3” file name may Operate the SEL switch to select desired file.
Fast-forward
produce noise from the speakers and speaker When this mode is activated by pressing the
damage, and can damage your hearing. SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be dis-
The disc is fast-forwarded while the but-
ton is held down. played in the display.
Folder selection order/MP3 file playback Playback will begin once the button is
order (Example) released. Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or
to select the folder or
Root folder (Root directory) file.
Fast-reverse
Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or
7 file
The disc is fast-reversed while the button
is held down.
Playback will begin once the button is
released. NOTE
 To cancel the selection, press the button
to return to the previous step.
To select a desired track
 If no operation is performed for 10 seconds
or more or other button is operated after the
Track up SEL switch has been turned, searching of the
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 desired file is canceled.
The disc will skip as many songs as the num-  If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or
ber of times the button is pressed. more after the file is displayed, playback
Folder selection starts.
in the order The display window will display the track
number of the track selected.  When the SEL indicator is not shown on the
display and the SEL switch is operated, the
File selection volume adjustment is activated.
in the order Track down
The disc will skip as many songs as the num-

ber of times the button is pressed.
The display window will display the track
number of the track
I
nf selected.
or
mati
onPr
ovidedby:

To repeat tracks To change the order of tracks for NOTE

playback  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
MP3 files, the random mode causes only
To repeat a track
files of the same format (CD-DA only or
Random playback for a disc (music CDs MP3 files only) to be played in a random
Press the RPT button to repeat the same track.
only) sequence.
If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indica-
tor will come on. If the RDM button is pressed, the RDM indi-
To exit this mode, press the button again. cator will come on and the tracks that are
CD text and MP3 title display
played will be selected at random.
N00752100179
To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3 To exit this mode, press the button again.
This CD player can display CD text and MP3
CDs only)
titles, including ID3 tag information.
7
Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs
While a song is playing, press the RPT button
only) CD text
for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a
beep). The F-RPT indicator will come on and If the RDM button is pressed, the F-RDM The CD player can display disc and track
the disc will repeat all the songs in the folder indicator will come on and the tracks that are titles for discs with converted disc and track
that contains the song currently playing. played will be selected at random from the title information. Press the DISP button
To exit this mode, press the button again. folder that is currently selected. repeatedly to make selections in the following
To exit this mode, press the button again. sequence: disc name  track name  normal
NOTE display mode.
 With a disc that contains both CD-DA and Random playback for all folders on a
MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files disc (MP3 CDs only)
of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3
NOTE
files only) to be repeated. Press the RDM button for 2 seconds or longer  The display can show up to 11 characters. If
a disc name or track name has more than 11
(until you hear a beep). The RDM indicator
characters, press the PAGE button to view
will come on and the tracks that are played the next 11 characters.
will be selected at random from all folders on  When there is no title information to be dis-
the disc currently selected. played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
To exit this mode, press the button again.  Characters that the CD player cannot display
are shown as “•”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

MP3 titles NOTE NOTE

 The display can show up to 11 characters. If  While the clock mode is selected, the display
The CD player can display folder and file a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag will switch to the applicable operation dis-
titles for discs with converted folder and file information has more than 11 characters, play whenever the CD player, external audio
information. Press the DISP button repeat- press the PAGE button to view the next 11 input mode or radio, etc. is operated. Then, if
edly to make selections in the following characters. no entries are made for 7 seconds, the dis-
sequence: folder name  file name  nor-  Characters that the CD player cannot display play will automatically return to the clock
mal display mode. are shown as “•”. mode.
ID3 tag information To display the clock

To adjust the clock
7 The CD player can display ID3 tag informa-
N00702600010
N00702700011
tion for files that have been recorded with Press the button to switch the clock mode.
ID3 tag information. To exit the clock mode, press the button.
1. Press the DISP button for 2 seconds or

longer to switch to the ID3 tag informa- Example
tion. CD player mode Clock mode
2. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make
selections in the following sequence:
album TAG  track TAG  artist TAG
 normal display mode.
NOTE A- (Clock) button

 To return from ID3 tag information to the B- (Clock adjustment up) button
folder name, press the DISP button again for
A- (Clock) button C- (Clock adjustment down) button
2 seconds or longer.
 When there is no title information to be dis-
played, the display shows “NO TITLE”. 1. Press and hold the button and the clock
display flashes.
2. Press the or button to adjust the
“hours” digit.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


If you keep pressing the button, fast-for-
ward begins.
To confirm the version number To change the language (vehi-
3. When the “hours” digit is adjusted, press of the Gracenote DB (vehicles cles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
the button to flash the “minutes” digit. with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) face)
Press the or button to adjust the N00702800012 N00702900013
“minutes” digit. It is possible to set the language used for

If you keep pressing the button, fast-for- voice control.
ward begins.
4. When the time is set, press the button
to stop the clock display from flashing.
7
NOTE
 Reset the time after the battery terminals are
disconnected and reconnected.
 Seconds do not appear in the clock display,
but after adjusting the “minutes” setting, the A- /MENU button
clock begins to operate from 0 seconds. B- button
C- button
A- /MENU button
B- button
1. Press and hold the /MENU button until C- button
you hear a beep. “GracenoteDB” will
appear on the display.
Each time the /MENU button is 1. Press and hold the /MENU button until
pressed, this switches in the order Grace- you hear a beep. “GracenoteDB” will
note DB, PHONE SET and cancel. appear on the display.
2. Press the or buttons several times 2. Press the /MENU button to select
to select “DB Version” and then press the “PHONE SET”.
/MENU button to determine. Then press the or buttons several
The Gracenote DB version is displayed. times to select “LANGUAGE” and then
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: press the /MENU button to determine.


3. Press the or buttons to select necting the audio equipment to the auxiliary
audio connector.
NOTE
“LangChg YES” and then press the
 The connected audio equipment cannot be
/MENU button to determine. adjusted using the vehicle’s audio system.
4. Press the or buttons to select lan- NOTE  Depending on the connected audio equip-
 Use a stereo mini-jack connector to connect ment, it may produce noise from the speak-
guage and then press the /MENU but-
the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio ers.
ton to determine.
connector.  Use the connected audio equipment’s own
5. Press the or buttons to select power source, such as its battery.
“LangSet YES” and then press the Noise may be produced from the speakers if
/MENU button to determine. To activate the external audio the connected audio equipment is used while
charging it using the accessory socket of the
input mode
7 To use the external audio input vehicle.
1. Connect the headphone port of the porta-  Do not activate the external audio input
function ble audio system to the auxiliary audio
mode when no audio equipment is con-
nected.
N00703000011
connector using a commercially available Otherwise, noise may be produced from the
connection cord. speakers.
2. Press the AUX button several times to  Connect audio equipment when the external
switch to the AUX mode. The display will audio input mode is deactivated or lower the
show “AUX” and then the external audio vehicle’s speaker volume before connecting
input mode will be activated. it.
3. To deactivate the external audio input Noise may be produced from the speakers if
mode, press the AUX button to switch to audio equipment is connected after the exter-
another mode. nal audio input mode is activated.
 Compared to the CD player mode and radio
CAUTION mode, the vehicle’s speaker volume will be
lower in the external audio input mode.
A- Auxiliary Audio connector (Mini-jack)  Do not operate the connected audio equip-
Therefore, be careful when switching from
B- AUX button ment while driving.
the external audio input mode to the CD
C- Display This could distract you and an accident
player mode or radio mode since the speaker
might occur.
volume will be higher.
 Do not use excessive force on the connection
You can listen to commercially available
cord. Otherwise, the cord and connectors
audio equipment, such as a portable audio
may be damaged.
system, from your vehicle’s speakers, by con- I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

ory device tracks via voice operation” on 9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder
NOTE page 7-35. random mode) indicator
 If the connection cord alone is left connected
10- SEL (Select) indicator
to the auxiliary audio connector, noise may
be produced from the speakers. NOTE 11- PAGE (Title scroll) button
 For information on how to connect and oper-  A file protected by copyright might not be 12- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button
ate the commercially available audio equip- able to playback. 13- (Fast-forward/Track up) button
ment, refer to the owner’s manual for the  It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of 14- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch
commercially available audio equipment. the connected device to 0 db or neutral. 15- RPT (Repeat) button
16- RDM (Random) button
To play tracks from USB
iPod control panel and display To play from an iPod
device (if so equipped) N00762300060
7
N00762400087
N00762200056
1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio
You can connect your iPod or USB memory system. The system turns on in the last
device to the USB input terminal and play mode used.
music files stored in the iPod or USB mem- 2. Connect your iPod to the USB input ter-
ory device. minal.
See the following section for the types of Refer to “How to connect an iPod” on
connectable devices and supported files. page 5-102.
Refer to “Types of connectable devices and 3. Press the CD button several times to
supported file specifications” on page 5-103. switch to the iPod mode. The input mode
See the following sections for the connecting changes as follows every time the CD but-
methods, “How to connect an iPod” on page 1- CD (Mode changeover) button ton is pressed: CD mode  iPod mode
5-102 and “How to connect a USB memory 2- RADIO button Bluetooth® mode (if so equipped) 
device” on page 5-101. 3- DISP (Title display)/ (Return) but- AUX mode  CD mode.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth® ton The iPod indicator are illuminated and
2.0 interface, you can play music files in your 4- (USB device active) indicator then the iPod mode will be activated.
iPod or USB memory device via voice opera- 5- iPod indicator 4. Once the device is selected, playback
tion. 6- Display starts and indicator appears on the dis-
Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice opera- 7- TRACK indicator play.
tion” on page 7-29 and “To play USB mem- 8- RPT (Repeat mode) indicator
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE Fast-reverse “Genre” (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-

face) menus on your iPod.
 Depending on the condition of your iPod, it
may take a longer time before the playback To fast-reverse the current track, press the
button. While the button is kept pressed, the Operate the SEL switch to select desired
starts.
track will be fast-reversed. tracks.
The selected menu or category or track is
5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO shown in the display.
button or CD button to switch to a differ- To select a desired track When this mode is activated by pressing the
ent mode. N00762600034
SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be dis-
Track up played in the display.
NOTE
7  Buttons on the iPod are disabled while the Press the button repeatedly until the Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or
iPod is connected to the audio system. desired track number appears on the display. to select the menu or
 To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To category or track.
adjust the volume” on page 7-18 and “To Turn the SEL switch :To show the menu or
adjust the tone” on page 7-19.
Track down
category or track.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired track number appears on the display.
To fast-forward/reverse the track NOTE
N00762500033
To fast-forward/reverse the current track,

NOTE  To cancel the selection, press the button
to return to the previous step.
press the button or button.  Pressing the button once during the song  If no operation is performed for 10 seconds
will cause the audio system to restart play- or more or other button is operated after the
Fast-forward back from the beginning of the song. SEL switch has been pressed, searching of
the desired tracks is canceled.
To fast-forward the current track, press the  If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or
button. While the button is kept pressed, To find a track from the iPod more after the track is displayed, playback
the track will be fast-forwarded. menu starts.
N00762700077  When the SEL indicator is not shown on the
display and the SEL switch is operated, the
You can select desired tracks from the “Playl- volume adjustment is activated.
ists”, “Artists”, “Albums”, “Songs” or
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


Album title  Track name  Artist name 
To play the same track repeatedly Preparation for voice operation
N00762800023 Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- N00763300067
face)  Normal display.
Press the RPT button during playback to To use the voice operation, press the
show “RPT” in the display. SPEECH button (A) first.
To exit this mode, press the button again. NOTE
 Up to 11 characters are shown in the display
at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
To play tracks in random order press the PAGE button. The next characters
N00762900024
are displayed every time this button is
Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the pressed.
display.  If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
The iPod randomly selects tracks from the the display. 7
current category and plays the selected tracks.  Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-
To exit this mode, press the button again. stituted by
“•”.
To play tracks in each album in

random order To play iPod tracks via voice
N00763000035
operation (vehicles with Blue- To search by artist name
Press and hold the RDM button until you hear
tooth® 2.0 interface)
N00763400039
a beep to show “F-RDM” in the display. 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
N00763200040
The iPod randomly selects tracks in the
album from the current category and play the Desired tracks can be selected and played NOTE
selected tracks. from your iPod by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playl-  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
To exit this mode, press the button again. ist” and “Genre” using voice commands. ing the connected device.
For information concerning the voice recog- If the connected device cannot be recognized
nition function or speaker registration func- or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
To switch the display
N00763100049 tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
page 5-81. guide. Follow the voice guide.
You can display the track titles, artist names,
The following explains how to prepare for
genre and album titles recorded in the iPod.
voice operation and play the tracks.
The display changes as follows every time
the DISP button is pressed during playback: I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


2. After the voice guide says “Would you 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or name>,” the system creates a playlist
NOTE
 If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip
Genre?,” say “Artist”. index for the artist.
step 3.
NOTE NOTE
 If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip  If the confirmation function is active, the 3. After the voice guide says “What Album
step 3. voice guide confirms if the artist name is would you like to play?” say the album
correct. If the artist name is correct, say title.
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
3. After the voice guide says “What Artist says “Artist not found, please try again,” the ceeds to step 6.
would you like to play?,” say the artist system returns to step 2.
5. If there are two or more matches, the
name.
7 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
voice guide will say “More than one
7. The system exits the voice recognition match was found, would you like to play
ceeds to step 6.
mode and starts playback. <album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
tem proceeds to step 6.
voice guide will say “More than one
If you say “No,” the name of the next
match was found, would you like to play To search by album title
matching album is uttered by the system.
<artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys- N00763500030
tem proceeds to step 6. 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.

If you say “No,” the next matching artist
NOTE
NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all album titles
is uttered by the system.
uttered by the system, the voice guide will
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- say “Album not found, please try again” and
NOTE ing the connected device. the system returns to step 2.
 If you say “No” to three or all artist names If the connected device cannot be recognized
uttered by the system, the voice guide will or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
say “Artist not found, please try again” and 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
the system returns to step 2. guide. Follow the voice guide. <album title>,” the system creates a playl-
 Search time depends on the number of songs ist index for the album title.
on your connected device. Devices contain-
ing a large number of songs may take longer 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
to return search results. like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
Genre?,” say “Album”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 If the confirmation function is active, the  If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip  If the confirmation function is active, the
voice guide confirms if the album title is cor- step 3. voice guide confirms if the playlist name is
rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”. If the device has no playlist, the voice guide correct. If the playlist name is correct, say
If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says will say “There are no playlists stored on “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide
“Album not found, please try again,” the sys- device” and the system returns to step 2. says “Playlist not found, please try again,”
tem returns to step 2. the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Con-
firmation function setting” on page 5-85.
3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist
7. The system exits the voice recognition would you like to play?,” say the playlist
mode and starts playback. name. 7. The system exits the voice recognition
mode and starts playback.
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- 7
To search by playlist ceeds to step 6.
N00763600031
5. If there are two or more matches, the To search by genre
1. Say “Play” on the main menu. voice guide will say “More than one N00763700032
match was found, would you like to play 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
NOTE <playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
proceeds to step 6. NOTE
If you say “No,” the next matching playl-
ing the connected device.  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
If the connected device cannot be recognized ist name is uttered by the system. ing the connected device.
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® If the connected device cannot be recognized
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice NOTE or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
guide. Follow the voice guide.  If you say “No” to three or all playlist names 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
uttered by the system, the voice guide will guide. Follow the voice guide.
say “Playlist not found, please try again” and
2. After the voice guide says “Would you the system returns to step 2.
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
Genre?,” say “Playlist”. like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
6. After the voice guide says “Playing Genre?,” say “Genre”.
<playlist>,” the system creates an index
for the playlist. NOTE
 If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step
3.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


3. After the voice guide says “What Genre 7. The system exits the voice recognition 14- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch
would you like to play?,” say the music mode and starts playback. 15- RPT (Repeat) button
type. 16- RDM (Random) button
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
USB control panel and display
ceeds to step 6.
N00763900063 To play from a USB memory
voice guide will say “More than one device
match was found, would you like to play N00764000087
<genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system 1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio
proceeds to step 6. system. The system turns on in the last
If you say “No,” the next matching genre mode used.
7 is uttered by the system. 2. Connect your USB memory device to the
USB input terminal.
NOTE Refer to “How to connect a USB memory
 If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered device” on page 5-101.
by the system, the voice guide will say 3. Press the CD button several times to
“Genre not found, please try again” and the 1- CD (Mode changeover) button switch to the USB mode. The input mode
system returns to step 2. 2- RADIO button changes as follows every time the CD but-
3- DISP (Title display)/ ton is pressed: CD mode  USB mode
(Return) but-
6. After the voice guide says “Playing ton Bluetooth® mode (if so equipped) 
<genre>,” the system creates an index for 4- AUX mode  CD mode.
(USB device active) indicator
the genre. The USB indicator are illuminated and
5- USB indicator
then the USB mode will be activated.
6- Display
NOTE 7- TRACK indicator 4. Once the device is selected, playback
 If the confirmation function is active, the 8- RPT (Repeat mode)/F-RPT (Folder
voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. starts and indicator appears on the dis-
repeat mode) indicator
If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say play.
“No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not
9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder
random mode) indicator
found, please try again,” the system returns
10- SEL (Select) indicator
NOTE
to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function  Depending on the condition of your USB
setting” on page 5-85. 11- PAGE (Title scroll) button
device, it may take a longer time before the
12- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button playback starts.
13- (Fast-forward/Track
I
nfor
mat
ionPr dedup)
ovi by: button


5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO
Fast-forward
button or CD button to switch to a differ-
Root folder (Root directory)
ent mode. To fast-forward the current track, press the
button. While the button is kept pressed,
NOTE the track will be fast-forwarded.
 To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To
adjust the volume” on page 7-18 and “To
adjust the tone” on page 7-19. Fast-reverse
To fast-reverse the current track, press the

button. While the button is kept pressed, the
Supported compressed music files
track will be fast-reversed.
N00764100105 7
This audio can play MP3, WMA and AAC Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
files recorded in a USB memory device. This To select a file
N00764300035
audio supports up to 65,535 files in 700 fold- Folder selection
ers on 8 levels. In the order Track up
Folder selection order/file playback File selection Press the button repeatedly until the
order (example) In the order desired file number appears on the display.
The folder and file hierarchy in the USB
memory device is shown below. Track down
NOTE
 If a file protected by copyrights is played, the Press the button repeatedly until the
file will be skipped. desired file number appears on the display.
NOTE
To fast-forward/reverse the track  Pressing the button once during the song
N00764200034
will cause the audio system to restart play-
To fast-forward/reverse the current track, back from the beginning of the file.
press the button or button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


To exit this mode, press the button again.
To find a file To play the same file repeatedly
N00703100012 N00764500024
Operate the SEL switch to select desired file. Press the RPT button to show “RPT” in the To switch the display
N00765100043
When this mode is activated by pressing the display. To cancel this mode, press the button
SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be dis- again. You can displays titles with tag information.
played in the display.
Folder title
To play the files in the same folder
Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or
repeatedly The display changes as follows every time
to select the folder or
N00764600038 the DISP button is pressed during playback:
file.
Press and hold the RPT button until you hear Folder name  File name  Normal display.
Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or
7 file. a beep to show “F-RPT” in the display.
All tracks in the current folder are played Tag information
repeatedly.
1. Press and hold the DISP button until you
NOTE To exit this mode, press the button again.
hear a beep.
 To cancel the selection, press the button 2. The display changes as follows every time
to return to the previous step. To play a folder in random order the DISP button is pressed briefly: Album
 If no operation is performed for 10 seconds N00764700039 TAG  Track TAG  Artist TAG 
or more or other button is operated after the Press the RDM button to show “F-RDM” in Genre TAG (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0
SEL switch has been turned, searching of the the display.
desired file is canceled.
interface)  Normal display.
The audio randomly selects tracks from the
 If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or
current folder and plays the selected tracks.
more after the file is displayed, playback
To exit this mode, press the button again. NOTE
starts.  Press and hold the DISP button again until
 When the SEL indicator is not shown on the you hear a beep, and the tag information dis-
display and the SEL switch is operated, the To play all folders in random play returns to the folder title display.
volume adjustment is activated. order  Up to 11 characters are shown in the display
N00764800030 at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
press the PAGE button. The next characters
Press and hold the RDM button until you hear
a beep to show “RDM” in the display. pressed.
The audio randomly selects tracks from all
folders and plays Ithe
nfor
maselected
t
ionPr
ovi tracks.
dedby:

To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
NOTE NOTE
 If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in  Depending on the connected device, opera-
the display. tion of the connected device is limited to its
 Characters that cannot be displayed are sub- available functions.
stituted by  Depending on the connected device, the
“•”. device may not operate correctly.
 A file protected by copyright might not be
able to playback.
To play USB memory device  It is recommended to adjust the equaliser of
tracks via voice operation (vehi- the connected device to 0 db or neutral.
cles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-  The voice operation is not available to access
face) music files on the connected Bluetooth® 7
device.
N00765200073 To play tracks from a Blue-
Desired tracks can be selected and played tooth® device (vehicles with
from your USB memory device by “Artist”,
“Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voice Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) Bluetooth® device control panel
commands. N00765300104 and display
For information concerning the voice recog- You can wirelessly connect a digital audio N00765400062
nition function or speaker registration func- player or cellular phone supporting Blue-
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on tooth® to listen to the tracks on the connected
page 5-81. device.
The playback sequence of tracks is the same Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” for the
as when an iPod is connected. Refer to the connecting method, etc. on page 5-81.
“To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on
page 7-29. The following explains the basic playback
method.
Preparation for voice operation
1- CD (Mode changeover) button
To use the voice operation, press the 2- PWR (On-Off) switch
SPEECH button (A) first. 3- BT (Bluetooth®) indicator
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
4- TRACK indicator
5- Display
NOTE Fast-forward
 Depending on the connected device, the
6- PAGE (Title scroll) button To fast-forward the current track, press the
playback may not start automatically.
7- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button In this case, operate the connected device to button. While the button is kept pressed,
8- (Fast-forward/Track up) button start the playback. the track will be fast-forwarded.
9- DISP (Title display) button
10- Play/Pause button Fast-reverse
11- Stop button To stop the playback (if supported
12- RPT (Repeat) button by the device) To fast-reverse the current track, press the
13- RDM (Random) button N00765600035 button. While the button is kept pressed, the
track will be fast-reversed.
7 To stop the playback, press the Stop button.
To listen to tracks from a device To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause
connected via Bluetooth® button. To select a track (if supported by
N00765500089 the device)
1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio To pause the playback (if sup- N00765800037
system. The system turns on in the last ported by the device) Track up
mode used. N00765700036
2. Press the CD button several times to Press the button repeatedly until the
To pause the playback, press and hold the
switch to the BT-A (Bluetooth®) mode. Play/Pause button until you hear a beep. desired file number appears on the display.
The input mode changes as follows every To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause
time the CD button is pressed: CD mode button. Track down
 iPod mode  Bluetooth® mode (if so
equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode. Press the button repeatedly until the
To fast-forward/reverse the track
The BT indicator are illuminated and then desired file number appears on the display.
the BT-A mode will be activated. (if supported by the device)
N00703200013
3. Connect your Bluetooth® device. NOTE
To fast-forward/reverse the current track,
Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0  Pressing the button once during the song
press the button or button.
interface and Bluetooth® device” on page will cause the audio system to restart play-
5-87. back from the beginning of the file.
4. Playback starts automatically.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped)
To play the same track repeatedly To play tracks in random order (if Steering wheel audio remote
(if supported by the device) supported by the device) control switches (if so equipped)
N00765900038 N00766000023
N00714800484
Press the RPT button several times to switch Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the
to show “RPT” in the display. display. The remote control switches are located on
The mode changes as follows every time the The system randomly selects and plays tracks the left side of the steering wheel.
RPT button is pressed: from all tracks in the Bluetooth® device. These switches can be used when the ignition
No display (not repeat)  RPT (repeat same To exit this mode, press the button again. switch or the operation mode is in ON or
track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No dis- ACC.
play
To switch the display (if supported
To exit this mode, press the button again.
by the device)
7
N00766200041
To play the all tracks repeatedly (if
The system can display tag information.
supported by the device)
N00703300014
1. Press the DISP button.
Press the RPT button several times to switch 2. The display changes as follows every time
to show “F-RPT” in the display. the DISP button is pressed:
The mode changes as follows every time the Album title  Title name  Artist name
RPT button is pressed:  Genre  Normal display
No display (not repeat)  RPT (repeat same
1- Vol + key, - key
track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No dis-
play
NOTE Adjust audio functions and the mobile
 Up to 11 characters are shown in the display phone function volume.
All tracks in the Bluetooth® device are played at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, 2- CH key, key
repeatedly. press the PAGE button. The next characters
To exit this mode, press the button again. Select CD and other audio source
pressed. tracks and radio stations.
 If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in Hold down to skip up and down
the display. through tracks.
 Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-
stituted by “•”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Error codes
3- MODE key *2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
Hold down to turn the audio function tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
is pressed, this switches the audio
source.
The order of switching is as shown
below.
7 *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is

required.
Error codes
N00736100780
If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
Audio system
Error display Item Repair

Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on Insert disc with label facing up.
CHECK DISC
disc. Remove moisture from disc.
Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces-
DISC ERROR Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop.
sive vehicle vibration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Error codes
Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring your vehicle
INTERNAL E Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position. to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice for repair.
HEAT ERROR Internal protection against high temperatures. Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.
Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
ERROR DC Foreign material is inside of radio or amplifier.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.
iPod (if so equipped)

7
NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod.
VER ERROR The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod.
USB memory device (if so equipped)

The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is displayed
FILE ERROR The file cannot be played. for several seconds, and then the next playable file is played
automatically.
UNSUPPORTED (first) 
The USB memory device cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device.
DEVICE (after)
UNSUPPORTED (first)  The USB memory device format cannot be rec-
Remove the USB memory device.
FORMAT (after) ognized.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Handling of compact discs

Remove the USB memory device.
An overcurrent or other power-supply error has
USB BUS PWR Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
occurred.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
LSI ERROR Internal device errors
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
• When there is high humidity (for exam-

Handling of compact discs ple, when it is raining).
N00734100340
• When the temperature suddenly rises,
7  Use only the type of compact discs that
have the mark shown in the illustration
such as right after the heater is turned on
in cold weather.
below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW
discs may cause problems.) In this case, wait until the moisture has
had time to dry out.
 When the CD player is subjected to vio-
lent vibrations, such as during off-road
driving, the tracking may not work.
 When storing compact discs, always store
them in their separate cases. Never place
compact discs in direct sunlight, or in any
place where the temperature or humidity
is high.
 Never touch the flat surface of the disc
where there isn’t a label. This will damage
 The use of special shaped, damaged com- the disc surface and could affect the sound
pact discs (like cracked discs) or low- quality. When handling a compact disc,
quality compact discs (like warped discs always hold it by the outer edge and the
or burrs on the discs) such as those shown  In the following circumstances, moisture center hole.
will damage the CD player. can form on compact discs and inside the
audio system, preventing normal opera-
tion. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Antenna
 To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry  Depending on the combination of the
cloth. Wipe directly from the center hole writing software, the CD recorder (CD-
toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a R/RW drive), and the disc used to create a
circle. Never use any chemicals such as CD-R/RW, the disc might not play suc-
benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray cessfully.
cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.  This player cannot play the CD-R/RW
 Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pen- discs if the session is not closed.
cil, etc. to write on the label surface of the  This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs
disc. which contain data other than CD-DA or
 Do not put additional labels or stickers on MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).
compact discs. Also, do not use any com-  Be sure to observe the handling instruc-
pact disc on which a label or sticker has tions for the CD-R/RW disc. 7
started to peel off or any compact disc that
has stickiness or other contamination left To install
by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use
WARNING
 Operating the CD player in a manner
such a compact disc, the CD player may Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base
other than specifically instructed herein
stop working properly and you may not be (B) until it is securely retained.
may result in hazardous radiation expo-
able to eject the compact disc. sure. Do not remove the cover and attempt
to repair the CD player by yourself. There NOTE
are no user serviceable parts inside. In
Notes on CD-Rs/RWs case of malfunction, contact an authorized
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
N00751900066
following cases:
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- • When using an automatic car wash
 You may have trouble playing back some ity of your choice.
CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD record- • When covering your vehicle with a car
ers (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their cover
recording characteristics or dirt, finger- • When driving into a structure that has a low
prints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface. Antenna ceiling.
 CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high N00734201508
temperatures and high humidity than ordi-

nary music CDs and can therefore be To remove
damaged and rendered unplayable if left
inside your vehicle for a long time. Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

General information about your radio
General information about Weak reception (fading)

your radio
N00733900455
Because of the limited range of FM signals
and the way FM waves transmit, you may
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and
experience weak or fading FM reception.
FM stations.
When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
The quality of your reception is affected by
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
turbed.
Signal transmission Reflection

7 FM signals do not follow the earth surface
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- The reason why one can hear FM but not AM Cross modulation
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
be received over long distances. AM signals FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected If one listens to a weak station and is in the
follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by by solid objects such as buildings, etc. vicinity of another strong station, both sta-
the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM Because FM signals are easily reflected by tions might be received simultaneously.
broadcasts can be received over longer dis- buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
tances. turbances.
The direct signal from the broadcast station
reaches the antenna slightly before the
FM AM reflected signal. This time difference may
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius

(40 to 64 km) (160 km)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

General information about your radio
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.
Causes of disturbances
7
FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
those without an electronic noise suppression
device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power
lines, lightning and other types of similar
electrical phenomena.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
Tire repair kit (if so equipped) ..........................................................8-6
How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire) .............8-11
Towing ...........................................................................................8-17
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-18 8
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-20
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836300233 N00836400768  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
slowly with the hazard lights flashing until Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the cle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in
WARNING “P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”
flashers flashing.  To reduce the risk of igniting flammable (Neutral).
gas that may be emitted from the battery,
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
If the engine stops/fails carefully read this section before jump-
position or put the operation mode in
starting the vehicle.
8  Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing
OFF.
If the engine stops, there will be no power or towing. This can cause an accident
assist to the steering and brakes, making these resulting in serious injury or death and NOTE
difficult to use. can damage the vehicle.  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
 The brake booster will not work, so the both batteries.
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal NOTE
will be harder to press than usual.  Do not use jumper cables if they have dam- 5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
 Since there is no power steering assist, the age or corrosion. the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on
steering wheel will be hard to turn. page 9-10.)
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
When the engine fails at the bands or bracelets that might create an WARNING
intersection accidental electrical contact.  If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or
2. Position the vehicles close enough looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP
together so that the jumper cables can STARTING!!
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, The battery might split open or explode if
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe the temperature is below the freezing
touching each other.
area. point or if it is not filled to the proper
level.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine

6. Connect one end of one jumper cable 8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
NOTE the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
charged battery (A), and then connect the utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
size.
other end to the positive (+) terminal with the discharged battery.
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could
of the booster battery (B). result. 9. After the engine is started, disconnect the
cables in the reverse order from the way
7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable you connected them.
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster battery (B), and then connect the Charging the battery by using
other end to the designated ground
location of the vehicle with the discharged
an external battery charger
battery (A) at the point farthest from the
battery. WARNING 8
 Always remove the battery from your
WARNING vehicle when the battery is charged by an
 Be sure to follow the proper order when external battery charger.
connecting the batteries, of:  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
WARNING    from the battery because the battery could
 Make sure that the jumper cables and  Make sure that the connection is made explode.
your clothing are clear of the cooling fans to the correct designated location (as  Keep your work area well vented when
and drive belts. Entanglement with the shown in the illustration) properly. If the charging or using the battery in an
fans or belts can cause serious personal connection is directly made to the negative enclosed space.
injury. (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable  Remove all the caps before charging the
gases from inside the battery might catch battery.
fire and explode, causing personal injury.  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
NOTE  When connecting the jumper cable, do not sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte
 Open the terminal cover before connecting connect the positive (+) cable to the nega- comes in contact with your hands, eyes,
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat- clothes, or the painted surface of your
the battery. tery explode. vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If
(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-10.) electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
immediately and thoroughly with water,
and get prompt medical attention.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If 6. When you do not see any more steam or
WARNING the fan is not turning, stop the engine spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
 Always wear protective clothing and gog-
immediately and contact an authorized leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
gles when working near the battery.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- careful as components will be hot. Any
 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
ity of your choice for assistance. leak source must be repaired.
dren.
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check
WARNING the coolant level in the engine coolant
As your vehicle has anti-lock  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair, reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too
brakes jewelry and clothes away from the cooling low, slowly add coolant.
fan. The cooling fan can start at any time. 8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs
coolant, you will probably also need to
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery
4. If you see steam or spray coming from add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen
charge after the engine has been started by
under the hood, turn off the engine. or remove the radiator cap until the engine
8 using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
This can cause the anti-lock braking system 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming has cooled down.
warning light to blink on and off. This is only from under the hood, leave the engine on
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a until the high coolant temperature warn- WARNING
problem with the brake system. If this hap- ing light goes off. After the high coolant  Removing the radiator cap could scald
temperature warning light has gone off, you with escaping hot water or steam.
pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the
you can start driving again. If the high When checking the radiator level, cover
charging system is operating properly. the cap with a cloth before trying to
coolant temperature warning light stays
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
on, turn off the engine.
Engine overheating wise, without pressing down, to the first
notch. The pressure in the system will then
N00836500365 WARNING be let out. When the pressure is COM-
If the high coolant temperature warning light  Before raising the engine hood, check to PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
illuminates during the engine is running, the see if there is steam or spray coming from keep turning the cap counterclockwise
engine may be overheating. If this happens: under the hood. Steam or spray coming until it comes off.
from an overheated engine could seriously
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on scald you.
Do not open the hood until there is no 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,
the hazard warning flashers. up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use
steam or spray.
2. With the engine still running, carefully plain water if you have to (and replace it
raise the engine hood to vent the engine with the right coolant as soon as possible).
compartment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-4 For emergencies

Jack and tools

10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it 3- Jack bar
Type A
fully. Check the coolant temperature 4- Towing hook
warning light. You can start driving again
when the high coolant temperature warn-
Jack (if so equipped)
ing light does not come on.
11. Have the system inspected by your autho- Type B
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair Before removing or storing the jack, move
facility of your choice. the driver’s seat fully forward to access the
jack from the rear seat area.
(Refer to “Front seat” on page 4-3.)
Jack and tools
N00836600379
CAUTION
Storage
 Never access, remove or store the jack from
the front of the driver’s seat. Doing so could
8
1- Tools damage electrical wires under the driver’s
The tools are stored beneath the floor board 2- Jack (if so equipped) seat.
of the cargo area. The jack (if so equipped) is
stored under the driver’s seat.
Tools To remove
Turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction

(1) until the jack fully retracts and remove the
jack from the holder (A).
To store
Put the jack in the holder (A) and turn the

shaft end of the jack in the direction (2) by
hand until the jack is firmly secured.
1- Tools bag
2- Wheel Inut
nf
or wrench
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For emergencies 8-5

Tire repair kit (if so equipped)
WARNING
 The tire repair kit may not permanently
seal a punctured tire. Have the tire
repaired as soon as possible.
 Using the tire repair kit may damage the
wheel and/or the tire inflation pressure
sensor for the tire. The vehicle must
promptly be inspected and repaired by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer after
using the tire repair kit.
 Use only the Mitsubishi Motors genuine
tire repair kit. Sealant in other repair kits
WARNING may not sufficiently seal the tire puncture.
8  After storing the jack in place, make sure
the jack is securely fixed in the holder.
1- Tire repair kit which consists of 2 to 5.
If the jack is not fixed securely, it may Tire repair kit storage 2- Tire compressor
move and hit an occupant in an accident
resulting in serious injury or death. Also
N00800500016 3- Tire sealant bottle
the jack may move forward during driv- The tire repair kit is stored beneath the floor 4- Speed restriction sticker
ing and could interfere with driver’s pedal board of the cargo area. 5- Bag
operation causing an accident.
How to use the tire repair kit

Tire repair kit (if so equipped) N00800600017
N00800400015
WARNING
The tire repair kit can be used to temporarily  Never use the tire repair kit under in any
repair a minor puncture in tread area caused of the situations listed below. The tire can-
by a nail, screw or similar object. Therefore, a not be repaired by the tire repair kit. If
spare tire is not provided. any of these situations occurs, please con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
• More than one tire is punctured.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-6 For emergencies


1. Park the vehicle on a safe, flat and level
WARNING WARNING place.
• The puncture hole has a length or width  The tire sealant can cause health damage
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
of 1/7 inch (4 mm) or greater. if swallowed. If you accidentally swallow
3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
• The tire is punctured in the side wall (A), it, drink as much water as possible and
immediately seek medical attention. axle, stop the engine and move the gear-
not in the tread (B).
 If the tire sealant gets in your eyes or on shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.
• The vehicle has been driven with the tire
almost completely flat. your skin, rinse it away with lots of water. On vehicles equipped with continuously
• The tire has completely slipped over the If you still sense an abnormality, seek variable transmission (CVT), move the
wheel rim and come off the wheel. medical attention. selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
• The wheel is damaged.  Consult a doctor immediately if any aller- and stop the engine.
• A bump, cut or crack is on the tire. gic reactions occur. 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
• The tire sealant’s expiration date has  Do not allow children to touch the tire set up a warning sign, such as a warning
passed. (The expiration date is shown on sealant. triangle or flashing signal lamp, at an ade-
the bottle label (C).) quate distance from the vehicle, and have 8
• The ambient temperature is below -40 °F all your passengers leave the vehicle.
(-40 °C) or above 140 °F (60 °C). CAUTION 5. Take out the tire repair kit.
 If the vehicle body is contaminated by the Make sure that the compressor switch is
tire sealant, wipe the tire sealant off immedi- OFF.
ately with a wet cloth. 6. Shake the tire sealant bottle well.
 Immediately wash clothes contaminated with
tire sealant. The tire sealant may not be
removed from the clothes.
NOTE
 Do not pull out an object, such as a nail or
screw, that penetrates the punctured tire.
 Move the vehicle so that the tire valve is
positioned away from the point where the
tire touches the ground. If the valve is near
the point where the tire touches the ground,
the sealant may not enter the tire easily.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For emergencies 8-7

NOTE
 In cold conditions (when the ambient tem-
perature is 32 °F {0 °C} or lower), thicken-
ing of the tire sealant can make the tire
sealant hard to squeeze out of the bottle.
Warm the bottle between your hands inside
the vehicle.
7. Take the valve cap (D) off the tire valve

(E).
9. Pull out the compressor’s hose (G) from

the bottom of the compressor and securely
NOTE
8 attach it to the valve (H) of the bottle by  When installing the bottle, align the projec-
tion (I) on the bottle with the indentation (J)
turning it clockwise until tight.
in the compressor.
11. Securely attach the bottle hose (F) to the

tire valve (E).
8. Unwind the bottle hose (F) from around

the sealant bottle.
10. Install the bottle onto the compressor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-8 For emergencies

CAUTION CAUTION
 If the bottle hose is not attached securely, the  Any sand or dust sucked into the compressor
tire sealant will leak out from the tire valve could make the compressor break down. Do
and the tire may not inflate to the specified not place the compressor directly on any
pressure. sandy or dusty surface when using it.
 Do not disassemble or modify the compres-
12. Pull out the compressor’s power cord (K), sor. Also, do not subject the air pressure
gauge to shock. It could malfunction.
insert the plug on the cord into the 12 V
power outlet (L), and then turn the igni- 13. Affix the speed restriction sticker (N) to
tion switch or the operation mode to the the three-diamond mark on the steering
ACC position. (Refer to “12V power out- wheel.
let” on page 5-106.)
Turn ON the compressor switch (M) and 8
inject all of the tire sealant and inflate the
tire to the specified pressure. (Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-14.) WARNING
If there is a gap between the tire and  Do not place your hand or fingers between
wheel, push the tread area toward the cen- the tire and wheel while inflating the tire.
ter of the wheel to close the gap before Your hand or fingers may become caught
between the tire and wheel.
running the compressor.
CAUTION
 The supplied compressor is designed only
for inflation of your vehicle tires.
CAUTION
 Do not affix the sticker anywhere except the
 The compressor is designed to run on a vehi-
specified position on the pad of the steering
cle’s 12 V power supply. Do not connect it to
wheel. Affixing the sticker in an incorrect
any other power source.
position could prevent the SRS airbag from
 The compressor is not waterproof. If you use
deploying properly.
it in rain, make sure water does not get on it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For emergencies 8-9


14. Check and adjust the tire pressure with
reference to the air pressure gauge on the
NOTE CAUTION
 If the tire pressure does not rise to the speci-  If you sense any abnormality while driving,
compressor. If you overinflate the tire,
fied level within 10 minutes, the tire may be stop the vehicle and contact an authorized
release air by pressing the pressure release
so severely damaged that the tire sealant can- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
switch (O) on the compressor. not be used for emergency repair. Do not of your choice. Otherwise the tire pressure
drive the vehicle. Please contact an autho- may drop before the emergency repair proce-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair dure is completed, rendering the vehicle
facility of your choice. unsafe to drive.
15. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then 17. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles (5
pull the power cord plug out of the 12 V km), park the vehicle in a safe place.
power outlet. Remove the air compressor from the
8 stowed position. Check the tire pressure
NOTE using the air pressure gauge on the com-
 At this point the puncture hole is not sealed pressor. If the tire pressure has not
yet. Air will continue to leak through the dropped, the emergency repair procedure
is complete. Proceed to step 19.
CAUTION puncture hole until the emergency repair pro-
cedure is completed (through step 17 or step If the tire pressure is insufficient, inflate
 The surface of the compressor will get hot
18 of these instructions). the tire to the specified pressure again and
while the compressor is running. Do not
keep the compressor running continuously drive the vehicle carefully without
for more than 10 minutes. After using the exceeding a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
16. When you have inflated the tire to the
compressor, wait for the compressor to cool Before driving, make sure that the com-
specified pressure, stow the compressor
before using it again. pressor is stowed.
and bottle in the vehicle and promptly
 If the compressor becomes sluggish or hot
start driving the vehicle so that the tire
while operating, it is overheating. Immedi-
sealant can spread evenly in the tire. CAUTION
ately place the switch in the OFF position  If the tire pressure is lower than the mini-
and let the compressor cool down for at least Drive with great care. Do not exceed a
mum permitted pressure (18 psi {130 kPa}),
30 minutes. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Observe local
the tire cannot successfully be repaired with
speed limits. the tire sealant. Do not drive the vehicle any
further. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-10 For emergencies

How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire)

18. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 19. Immediately drive with great care to an 3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
km) again, check the tire pressure using authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a axle, stop the engine and move the gear-
the air pressure gauge on the compressor. repair facility of your choice and have the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.
If the tire pressure has not dropped, the tire repair/replacement performed. On vehicles equipped with continuously
emergency repair procedure is complete. variable transmission (CVT), move the
Before driving, make sure that the com- NOTE selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
pressor is stowed. You must still not  Please give the empty sealant bottle to an and stop the engine.
exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or dis- 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
Observe local speed limits. pose of the sealant bottle according to regu- warning triangle, flashing signal light,
lations for the disposal of chemical waste. etc., at an adequate distance from the
NOTE  To purchase a new tire sealant bottle, contact vehicle, and have all your passengers exit
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the vehicle.
 If the tire pressure has dropped below the
specified level when you check it at the end 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
of the repair procedure, do not drive the it is raised on the jack, place chocks or 8
vehicle any further. Contact an authorized How to change a tire (Vehi- blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
of your choice. cles equipped with spare
ing.
 In cold conditions (when the ambient tem- tire)
perature is 32 °F {0 °C} or lower), the time N00836900819
and driving distance required until comple-
tion of the repair can become longer than in WARNING
warmer conditions, and the tire pressure may
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
drop below the specified level even after you
pose other than to change a tire.
have inflated the tire the second time and
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
subsequently driven the vehicle. If this hap-
portion of your body under the vehicle
pens, inflate the tire to the specified pressure
while it is supported by the jack.
once more, drive for about 10 minutes or 3
miles (5 km), then check the tire pressure
again. If the tire pressure has again dropped Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle
below the specified level, stop driving the in a safe, flat location.
vehicle and contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your 1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
choice. ground.
2. Set the parking
Inf
ormat
i
brake
onPr
ovi
firmly.
dedby:
For emergencies 8-11

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over  Do not drive through automatic car washes
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If time with age even when they are not and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
the vehicle moves while jacked up, the being used. It is recommended that tires age the underside of your vehicle. Because
jack could slip out of position, leading to over 6 years generally be replaced even if the compact spare tire is smaller than the
an accident. damage is not obvious. original tire, there is less clearance between
the ground and your vehicle.
 Because the compact spare tire is designed
NOTE CAUTION only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
 The chocks shown in the illustration do not  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the other vehicle.
come with your vehicle. It is recommended inflation pressure should be checked at least  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep once a month to assure that it remains at the ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
them in the vehicle for use if needed. recommended inflation pressure. See the tire snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
8  If chocks or blocks are not available, use and loading information placard attached to compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
stones or any other objects that are large the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load- damage these parts or other parts on your
enough to hold the wheel in position. ing information placard” on page 11-3. vehicle.
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can  Do not use tire chains with your compact
cause an accident. If you have no choice but spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
ready. your speed down and avoid sudden steering
(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.) or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
To remove spare tire
N00849700286
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-14.
Spare tire information  The compact spare tire should be used only
1. Lift up the floor board of the cargo area.
N00849600344
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is 2. To remove the spare tire, remove the
being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- installation clamp (A) by turning it coun-
Compact spare tire tem will not function properly. Have the tire terclockwise.
replaced or repaired at an authorized
The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the
of your choice as soon as possible.
floor board of the cargo area. It is designed to
 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
save space in the cargo area. Its lighter weight ing with the compact spare tire.
makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs.  Avoid sudden starting and braking when
driving with theI
nf
compact
or
mationPr
spare
ovi
tire.
dedby:

WARNING
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.
NOTE
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking  Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
NOTE points (A) shown in the illustration. Use near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
 The flat tire with a normal size wheel cannot
the jacking point closest to the tire you slips out of position. 8
be stored beneath the floor board. Store the
wish to change.
flat tire in the cargo area.
To change a tire
N00849800447
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first

remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
ers” on page 8-16). Then, loosen the
wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
not remove the wheel nuts yet.
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange

WARNING portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
 Set the jack only at the positions shown of the jack.
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
WARNING face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
mount the spare tire.
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut  The jack should not be used for any pur-
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar pose other than to change a tire.
8 into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the  No one should be in your vehicle when
illustration. using the jack.
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until  Do not start or run the engine while your
the tire is raised slightly off the ground vehicle is on the jack. WARNING
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
surface.
that are still on the ground could turn and (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
make your vehicle fall off the jack. valve stem (I), you have installed the
wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
installed backwards can cause vehicle
wrench, then take the wheel off.
damage and result in an accident.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
CAUTION
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to
nut wrench counterclockwise.
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
is listed on the tire and loading informa-
7. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered tion placard attached to the driver’s door
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to 8
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the
illustration until each nut has been tight-
Steel wheel
ened to the torque listed here.
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)
Aluminum wheel
CAUTION
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

CAUTION Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION

 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can N00849400225  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
cause an accident. If you have no choice but your bare hands can seriously injure your
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep To remove fingers.
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to into the notch provided in the wheel cover, To install
and pry the cover away from the wheel.
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
cover notches, work the wheel cover away CAUTION
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
from the wheel to remove it completely.  Before installing the wheel cover to the
come loose.
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
8 after changing the tire, have the tire checked
ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from
for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi
coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
has broken tabs.
choice.
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.
To store the flat tire or spare

tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
wrench NOTE
N00850000175  The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
Store the flat tire in the cargo area. ful when prying it off.
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut 1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel
wrench. cover notch (D).
Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page
8-12 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Towing
NOTE
 Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing.
These hooks are provided only for the pur-
pose of transporting the vehicle itself.
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area.
Obey the regulations of the area where you
are driving your vehicle.
NOTE
 Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) Towing 8
provided on the reverse side to show the air N00837000888
valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
If your vehicle needs to be
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air towed
valve. Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style.
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to

2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
into the wheel. vice.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cover and hold them in place with both cle using a tow truck.
knees. Incorect towing equipment could damage
4. Gently tap around the circumference of your vehicle.
the wheel cover at the top (H), then push
the wheel cover into place. CAUTION
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
cle with a rope.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Operation under adverse driving conditions
Towing the vehicle by a tow CAUTION Towing a front-wheel drive vehi-

truck  If the vehicle is towed with the ignition cle with front wheels off the
switch in the “ON” position or the operation ground (Type C)
mode in ON and only the front wheels or
CAUTION only the rear wheels raised off the ground
Release the parking brake.
(Type B or C), the Active Stability Control
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
(ASC) may operate, resulting in an accident.
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
When towing the vehicle with the rear position (manual transaxle) or the selector
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.
wheels raised, turn the ignition switch to the lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
“ACC” position or put the operation mode in (CVT).
 Do not tow continuously variable transmis-
ACC. When towing the vehicle with the
sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously
or the operation mode as follows. Operation under adverse
8 variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
driving conditions
F.A.S.T.-key]
reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam- N00837200750
The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC”
aging it.
position.
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E
equipment.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] If your vehicle becomes stuck in
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or sand, mud or snow
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv-
ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as Towing with rear wheels off the If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,
illustrated. ground (Type B - M/T vehicles or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
only) motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
free it.
Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
position. Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let
position with a rope or tie-down strap. the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the
transaxle before trying again.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck
service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Operation under adverse driving conditions
WARNING On snowy or icy roads CAUTION

 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
stuck position, make sure that there are no  When driving on a road covered with The vehicle could start moving when it
people nearby. The rocking motion can snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward cannot be used on your vehicle. There an accident.
or backward, and injure any bystanders. may be state or local regulations about
using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using On a bumpy or rutted road
On wet roads them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-17
and “Tire chains” on page 9-17.  Drive as slow as possible when driving on
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes etc.
CAUTION or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
brakes.
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-
CAUTION 8
by driving into flood water.  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and holes can damage the tires and wheels.
 When driving in rain, on water-covered avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
roads, or through a car wash, water could get  If a skid occurs when the accelerator
into the brake discs and make them fail tem- inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the age.
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the  The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly skid. other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
several times while driving to dry the brake  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock • driven over a step (for example, at the
pads or linings, then check them again. braking system (ABS). Hold the brake entrance or exit of a parking lot);
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may pedal down firmly and keep it depressed. • parked too closely against a curb or parking
form between the tires and the road surface Do not pump the brake pedal which will block, or by the side of a road with curb-
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip result in reduced braking performance. stones;
on the road, making it difficult to steer or  After parking on snowy or icy roads, it • driven on a steep slope.
brake properly. When driving on a wet road: may be difficult to move your vehicle due
• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. to the brake being frozen. Depress the
• Do not drive on worn tires. accelerator pedal little by little to move
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- the vehicle when safe to do so.
tion pressures.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuel Pump Shut-off System
Fuel Pump Shut-off System

N00860600031
WARNING
 Before attempting to restart the engine
after a collision, always inspect the ground
under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
not restart the engine.
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer after any collision.
8 In the event of a collision causing frontal air-

bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-3
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-4
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9 9
Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9
Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-10
Battery ............................................................................................9-10
Tires ...............................................................................................9-12
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-18
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-18
Parking brake .................................................................................9-18
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-19
General maintenance .....................................................................9-20
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-21
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-22
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-22
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-26
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-31
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-32
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-33 Informat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Service precautions
Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
Service precautions WARNING Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
 The fan can turn on automatically even if
N00937300387
supplements your new vehicle warranties.
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre- See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
tion switch to the “OFF” position or put
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- the operation mode in OFF to be safe for details.
sible. while you work in the engine compart-
You can do some of the maintenance work

ment. If your vehicle is raised with a
 Do not smoke or allow open flames around
yourself, and the rest should only be per- fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma- garage jack
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors ble.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.  Be extremely careful when working Only use the designated positions shown in
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- around the battery. It contains poisonous the illustration.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on
of your choice. a jack.
9 This section describes the maintenance Always use properly rated automotive Never use the rear
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so jack stands. suspensions as a jack-
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi- ing point.
tions for each procedure. als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice if you
WARNING have questions.
 When checking or servicing the inside of
the engine compartment, be sure the
engine is stopped and has had a chance to
cool down.
 If you need to work in the engine compart-
ment with the engine running, be espe-
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. *- Front of the vehicle
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts,
or other moving parts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Catalytic converter
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
WARNING CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as
 Set a garage jack only at the position  Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests.
shown here. If the garage jack is set a if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
wrong position, it could damage your condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
vehicle and/or your vehicle might fall fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
from the jack causing injury or death. have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur- vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from
face. damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause race the engine when stopping the engine.
personal injury. Always use the jack on a  Stop driving the vehicle if you think the
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, WARNING performance is noticeably low, or the
make sure there are no sand or pebbles  Do not park or run your vehicle in areas engine has a malfunction such as with the
under the jack base. where combustible materials such as dry ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
grass or leaves can come in contact with a driving immediately, slow down and drive
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. for only a short time. Have your vehicle
Catalytic converter  Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
9
N00937400450
lytic converter. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
The catalytic converter requires you to use choice as soon as possible.
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-  In unusual situations involving major
destroy the emission-control effectiveness of verter damage: engine problems, a burning odor may
the converter. indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
Normally, the catalytic converter does not the type of recommended in the “Fuel in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
require maintenance. However, it is important selection”. the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-  Do not drive with an extremely low fuel immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
verter to continue to work properly. level. Running out of gas could damage or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
the catalytic converter. vice.
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
Engine hood CAUTION
N00937501575  Always insert the support prop into the hole
specially made for it. Propping the engine
hood at any other place could cause the prop
To open to slip out and lead to an accident.
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is
Use the engine hood release lever (located lifted by a strong wind.
under the instrument panel near the driver’s
door) to unlock the engine hood.
To close
Pull the lever toward you to release the
engine hood latch. Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and
put it back in its retainer.
NOTE
9  To prevent damage to the engine hood and
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting
position when you open the engine hood.
Support the engine hood with the hood prop.

Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
WARNING Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches

 Never use the release lever to unlatch the (20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked. CAUTION
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
when closing the engine hood.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

View of the engine compartment
CAUTION View of the engine compart- Engine oil and oil filter
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
before driving.
ment N00937702011
N00937600713
If you drive without the engine hood com-
pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
To check and refill engine oil
ing.
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
need to add oil between the recommended oil
NOTE change intervals. Before starting the engine,
 If this does not close the engine hood prop- check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
position. To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
 Do not push down strongly on the engine wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way.
hood. Depending on how strongly or where Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and
you push down, you could create a dent in check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
the vehicle body. 1- Engine oil level dipstick face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
9
2- Air cleaner filter above the line on the dipstick.
3- Battery
4- Brake fluid
5- Windshield and rear window washer NOTE
fluid reservoir  If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe
6- Engine oil filler cap off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a
moment and then recheck the oil level by
7- Radiator cap
checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
8- Engine coolant reserve tank
If the level does not reach the line which

shows the minimum amount of oil required,
remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
Good vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark

CAUTION
 Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
oil pressure, which could damage the engine. Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only 1- The upper part indicates the quality of
9 engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym- the oil.
bol on the front of the container. 2- The center part indicates the SAE grade
WARNING of the oil viscosity.
 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam- ILSAC certification symbol
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders, Recommended engine oil vis-
including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
cosity
oughly after working with it.
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children. Use engine oil with the proper thickness for
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving.
NOTE
 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc. If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
or higher oil with the following label.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Engine coolant
require that the filter can withstand a pressure
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi
To add coolant
oil filter is the best replacement filter.
Follow the installation instructions printed on Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
the filter. Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
Engine coolant nitrate and non-borate coolant with long
N00937800597
life hybrid organic acid technology
To check the coolant level

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic
The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you excellent protection against corrosion and
Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
quickly see when you need to add coolant. rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
economy and cold weather starting.
num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the
If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn- When the engine is cold, the level of the cool-
ant in the reserve tank should be between the engine. 9
thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually If you need to add coolant often, or if the
grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
stays full so there is no reason to remove the level in the reserve tank does not drop when
can be used.
radiator cap (B) except when you check the the engine cools, the cooling system should
However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20
coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the
coolant. cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
next oil change to maintain optimum fuel
or a repair facility of your choice for testing.
economy and cold weather starting.
CAUTION
To replace the oil filter  Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or FULL the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND parts.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. LOW
Only use high quality replacement filters on
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Air cleaner filter
CAUTION WARNING Air cleaner filter

 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-  Wait for the engine to cool down before N00937900413
fers depending on the expected ambient tem- opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
perature. steam or boiling coolant could spray up
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration from the radiator and scald you.
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
of anti-freeze with a new filter using the schedule in the
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
of anti-freeze MANUAL”.
You can check the concentration level with a
Points to remember
gauge from an automotive supply store, or 1. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the
 Do not overfill the reserve tank. cover and take out the air cleaner filter.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
service station can check it for you.
 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration
that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
of coolant. from the reserve tank back to the radiator
 Do not top off the tank with plain water only. when the engine cools down. If you need
9 Water by itself boils at a lower temperature to change the cap, use the exact same
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the kind.
water freezes, it will damage your cooling  Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause ator with the proper gauge, and only when
corrosion and rust. it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
Radiator cap against freezing.
 Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean. 2. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the
The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre- cover back on in its original position.
 If the engine coolant temperature does not
vent losing coolant, which may result in
rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
engine damage. Only use a Genuine
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi NOTE
Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved  Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-
equivalent. mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
choice to have the thermostat checked,
 Make sure that the connector is properly
and replaced if necessary.
reconnected.
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: are firmly set.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)
CAUTION Continuously variable Washer fluid

 Take care not to scratch the engine air flow
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.
transmission (CVT) fluid (if N00938601339
The windshield and rear window washer fluid

so equipped)
reservoir is in the engine compartment.
N00938101129
Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
Manual transaxle oil (if so The continuously variable transmission vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-
equipped) (CVT) should be maintained and serviced by essary.
N00938200181 an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Open the reservoir cap and check the level of
repair facility of your choice to obtain the washer fluid.
Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is best performance and longest life. It is impor- The washer fluid level should be kept approx-
checked, add oil to maintain the proper level, tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the imately 5 cm below the upper surface of the
if necessary. correct level. reservoir.
Refill or change with the oil according to the
table below.
Fluid type 9
Oil type Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Upper surface
CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-
Mitsubishi Motors mum transmission performance.
Genuine NEW Full
Lubricant MULTI GEAR OIL CAUTION
ECO API Classifica-  Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
tion GL-4 age the transaxle.
Viscosity range SAE 75W-80 When freezing weather is anticipated, flush
out the water in the reservoir by operating the
Special additives pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate
Do not use any fluid additives to the trans- the system for a few seconds to flush out the
mission. residual water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Brake fluid
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
Brake fluid authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Checking battery electrolyte
N00938700274
repair facility of your choice. level
N00901500072
To check the fluid level Fluid type The electrolyte level must be between the
limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
The fluid level must be between the “MAX” it with distilled water as needed. The inside of
Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or the battery is divided into several compart-
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
sealed to keep dirt and water out. and fill to the mark.
Do not fill above the top line because a spill
CAUTION during driving could cause damage.
MAX
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
will damage the seals.
9  Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
MIN
damage painted surfaces.
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the  Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
brake pads, but this does not indicate any the brake fluid from evaporating.
abnormality.
The fluid in the master cylinder should be

checked when doing other work under the Battery WARNING
engine hood. The brake system should also be N00939100943  If the battery goes flat, be sure to check
the battery electrolyte level before con-
checked for leaks at the same time. The condition of the battery is very important
necting booster cables.
If the fluid level falls noticeably in a short for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
 After checking the battery electrolyte
length of time, it indicates leaks from the electrical system working properly. Check the level, make sure the caps are fitted
brake system. battery regularly. securely.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Battery
WARNING NOTE WARNING

 If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace  Open the terminal cover (A) before discon- • If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or
the battery. necting or connecting the positive (+) termi- other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft
nal of the battery. cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of
 Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the water and neutral detergent then imme-
During cold weather battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. diately rinse the affected parts with
N00901600060 plenty of water.
The battery is weaker in cold temperatures. • If electrolyte gets on your hands or
This has to do with its chemical and physical clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If
properties and is why a very cold battery, electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
especially one with a low charge, will have a with water immediately and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
hard time starting your vehicle.
 Open doors and windows in any closed
It is recommended that you have your battery
space where you may be charging or
and charging system checked by an autho- working with the battery.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair  Always wear protective clothing and gog- 9
facility of your choice before the start of cold gles when working with the battery, or
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This WARNING have a skilled automobile technician do it.
will provide more reliable starting, and longer  Never disconnect the battery while the  If you are quick-charging your battery,
battery life. engine is running, or you could damage first disconnect the battery cables.
the vehicle’s electrical parts.  In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
Disconnection and connection first, and reconnect it last.
cause it to overheat and be damaged.
N00901701130
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away  Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the from the battery because the battery could sories contain lead and lead compounds.
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal explode. Wash hands after handling.
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+) sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- NOTE
before starting the vehicle. color them. And if it gets on your skin or  Check each battery terminal for corrosion.
in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind- You can stop more corrosion by washing
ness. Please observe the following han- with a solution of baking soda and water.
dling instructions: Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: tightening them.

Tires
 Cold tire pressure:  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by
NOTE • The measured pressure after the vehicle its manufacturer as primarily intended for
 Check to see that the battery is securely
has been parked for at least three hours, use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
installed and cannot be moved. Also check
or passenger vehicles.
each terminal for tightness.
• The measured pressure when the vehicle  Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
 If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
long period of time, remove the battery and is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after contact with the road.
store it in a place where the battery fluid will having been parked for three hours.  Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
not freeze. The battery only should be stored  Maximum pressure: the maximum per- ferentially around a tire.
with a full charge. missible cold tire inflation pressure for  Tread separation: pulling away of the
 Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the this tire. tread from the tire carcass.
filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.  Recommended inflation pressure: the  Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
mance. bears the load.
Tires  Intended outboard sidewall:  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
N00939200566
• The sidewall that contains a whitewall, tread and bead.
9 bears white lettering or bears manufac-  Section width: the linear distance between
WARNING
turer, brand, and/or model name molding the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
 Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
or improperly inflated is dangerous. that is higher or deeper than the same inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
These type tire conditions will adversely molding on the other sidewall of the tire, labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
affect vehicle performance. or  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
These type tire conditions can also cause a • The outward facing sidewall of an asym- steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
tread separation or blowout which may metrical tire that has a particular side cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
result in an accident causing serious that must always face outward when  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
injury or death. mounted on a vehicle. cords.
 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
time with age even when they are not on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- tire.
being used.
ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
It is recommended that tires over 6 years
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 and tube assembly upon which the tire
generally be replaced even if damage is
not obvious.
pounds or less. beads are seated.
 Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the
bead seat.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms: I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Tires
 Groove: the space between two adjacent 15 Rim diameter in inches (in) Speed symbol
tread ribs. A symbol indicating the range of
speeds at which a tire can carry a
NOTE
Tire Markings  European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based
load corresponding to its load
index under certain operating con-
on European/Japanese design standards.
ditions.
Tires designed to these standards have the H
tire size molded into the sidewall beginning The maximum speed correspond-
with the section width. The letter “P” is ing to the speed symbol should
absent from this tire size designation. Exam- only be achieved under specified
ple: 215/65R15 96H. operating conditions. (i.e. tire pres-
 LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based sure, vehicle loading, road condi-
on U.S.A. design standards. The size desig- tions and posted speed limits)
nation for LT-metric tires is the same as for
P-metric tires except for the letters “LT” that
are molded into the sidewall preceding the Maximum Load
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 9
 Temporary spare tires are high pressure com- Maximum load indicates the maximum load
pact spares designed for temporary emer- this tire is designed to carry.
Size Designation gency use only. Tires designed to this
standard have the letter “T” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. WARNING
EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 Example: T145/80D18 103M.  Overloading of your tire is dangerous.
Passenger car tire size based on Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
P vehicle handling, and increase your stop-
U.S.A. design standards
ping distance. Use tires of the recom-
215 Section width in millimeters (mm) Service Description
mended load capacity for your vehicle.
Aspect ratio in percent (%) Never overload them.
65 Ratio of section height to section EXAMPLE: 95H
width of tire. Load index
Construction code 95 A numerical code associated with
• “R” means radial construction. the maximum load a tire can carry.
R
• “D” means diagonal or bias con-
struction. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Tires
Number representing the week in specified government test surfaces of asphalt
Maximum Pressure
15 which the tire was manufactured. and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
(2 digits) traction performance.
Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum
permissible cold tire inflation pressure for Number representing the year in
04 which the tire was manufactured. Temperature
this tire.
(2 digits) The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
Tire Identification Number (TIN) and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
Treadwear, Traction and Temper- generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
The TIN may be found on one or both sides ature Grades heat when tested under controlled conditions
of the tire but the date code may only be on on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard Sustained high temperature can cause the
Treadwear material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
side of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the
TIN is not found on the outboard side then tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
9 you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
sponds to a level of performance which all
under controlled conditions on a specified
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504 passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
government test course. For example, a tire
Department of Transportation eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
This symbol certifies that the tire is Grades B and A represent higher levels of
(11/2) times as well on the government course performance on the laboratory test wheel than
in compliance with the U.S.
DOT as a tire graded 100. The relative performance the minimum required by law.
Department of Transportation tire
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
safety standards, and is approved
their use, however, and may depart signifi-
for highway use.
cantly from the norm due to variations in Tire inflation pressures
Code representing the tire manu- driving habits, service practices and differ- N00939300903
MA
facturing location. (2 digits) ences in road characteristics and climate. Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for
Code representing the tire size. (2 the safe and satisfactory operation of your
L9 digits) Traction vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause
ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 problems in three major areas:
to 4 digits) The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent  Safety
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under Infcontrolled
or
mati
onPr
ovi conditions
dedby: on
Tires
Too little pressure increases flexing in the The recommended inflation pressures under specified cold pressure, or your tires will be
tire and can cause tire failure. Too much normal driving conditions should be used for too low.
pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability the tires listed below. Check your tires each time you refuel. If one
to cushion shock. Objects on the road and tire looks lower than the others, check the
potholes could then cause tire damage that Item Tire size Front Rear pressure for all of them.
may result in tire failure. 240 240 You should also take the following safety pre-
 Economy Normal tire 165/65R14 kPa, kPa, cautions:
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven 35 psi 35 psi
wear patterns in the tire tread. These  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
abnormal wear patterns will reduce the Compact mended pressures. (See the tire and load-
tread life, and the tire will have to be spare wheel 420 kPa, 60 ing information placard attached to the
T115/70D14
replaced sooner. (if so psi driver’s door sill.)
Too little pressure also makes it harder for equipped)  Stay within the recommended load limits.
the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.  Make sure that the weight of any load in
 Ride comfort and vehicle stability Tire pressures should be checked, and your vehicle is evenly distributed.
The superior riding experience built into adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.  Drive at safe speeds. 9
your vehicle partly depends on the correct Pressures should be checked more often  After filling your tires to the correct pres-
tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an whenever weather temperatures change sure, check them for damage and air
uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little severely, because tire pressures change with leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed valve stems.
respond. are always “cold inflation pressure”.
Unequal tire pressures can make steering Cold inflation pressure is measured after the Replacing tires and wheels
your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. vehicle has been parked for at least three N00939600430
hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor- after having been parked for three hours. CAUTION
mal driving conditions is listed on the placard Cold inflation pressure must not go above the  Avoid using different size tires from the one
attached to the driver’s door sill. maximum values molded into the tire side- listed and the combined use of different
(Refer to “Tire and loading information plac- wall. After driving several miles, your tire types of tires, as this can affect driving
ard” on page 11-3.) inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14 safety.
to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Tires
CAUTION Tread wear indicator Tire rotation

 If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- N00939800184 N00939900521
sure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi To even out the wear on your tires and make
Motors Authorized wheels should be used.
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly. the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
However, the timing for tire rotation may
Tire maintenance vary according to your vehicle condition,
N00939700141 road surface conditions, and your own per-
The following maintenance steps are recom- sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
mended: unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
1- Location of the tread wear indicator sible.
 Check tire pressures regularly.
9  Have regular maintenance done on the
2- Tread wear indicator
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,
wheel balance and front and rear suspen- damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal
sion alignment. Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-
 Rotate your tires regularly as described in nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,
the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-16. you know when your tires should be replaced. wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe
Many states have laws requiring that you braking.
replace your tires at this point. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
These indicators are molded into the bottom dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
of the tread grooves and will appear when the find out the reason for uneven tread wear.
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6
mm). The first tire rotation is the most important
When the bands appear next to one another in one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.
two or more places, replace your tires.
NOTE
 Tire wear indicators can have different marks
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
turer. I
nfor
mati
onProvi
dedby:

Tires
Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation CAUTION Snow tires
direction  If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the N00940000418
correct direction of rotation, swap the front In some areas of the country, snow tires are
Front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
required in your area, you must choose snow
right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
Tires that have arrows showing rotation direc- Keep each tire on its original side of the tires of the same size and type as the original
tion vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires
the arrows point in the direction in which the should also be installed on all four wheels.
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
Front ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the can be reduced.
wrong direction will not perform to its full Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
potential. should not be operated at sustained speeds
over 75 mph (120 km/h).
CAUTION
9
CAUTION Front
 A compact spare tire (if so equipped) can be  If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
installed temporarily in place of a tire that sure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi
has been removed during the tire rotation. Motors Authorized wheels should be used.
However, it must not be included in the regu- Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
lar tire rotation sequence. and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
Tire chains
N00940100116
CAUTION
 Avoid the combined use of different types of CAUTION
tires. Using different types of tires can affect  Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
vehicle performance and safety. The clearance between the chains and the
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
aged.

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)

eral times with your foot. Then press the slowly and count the number of clicks of the
Clutch pedal free play (if so pedal down with your fingers until you first ratchet.
equipped) feel resistance.
N00940200090
Parking brake lever stroke:
Brake pedal free play: 7 to 9 notches (clicks)
To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm) (Parking brake adjustment when pulled with
off the engine and press the pedal until you the force of 200 N)
feel resistance.
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
Clutch pedal free play: the ratchet after pulling.
.4 to .6 inch (11 to 16 mm)
If the free play is not within these limits, take

your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
choice for adjustment.
If the free play is not within these limits, take WARNING

Parking brake  Continued operation of the vehicle with
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi N00940400252 the parking brake lever out of adjustment
may result in the vehicle moving when
choice for adjustment.
Parking brake lever stroke unattended.
Brake pedal free play Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
N00940300336 sionally. To check this, pull the lever up
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn
off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Wiper blades
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
Wiper blades trol system is made of:
NOTE
N00940700138  To meet government regulations and pro-
 a positive crankcase ventilation system mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean
 an evaporative emission-control system with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
them regularly to remove deposits of salt and The engine electronic control module that
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild  an exhaust emission-control system
controls OBD functions stores various data
detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the (especially about the exhaust emissions).
blades and glass areas. To be sure the emission-control system works This data will be erased if the battery cable is
Replace the blades if they continue to streak properly, have your vehicle inspected and disconnected, which could make a rapid
or smear. maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your battery cable when the engine malfunction
choice. This should be done at the time or indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or
NOTE mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND “Check engine light”) is ON.
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
time. This wears out the rubber and can
These, and all the other “general” mainte-
scratch the glass.
nance services listed in this manual, need to Spark plugs 9
be performed to keep your vehicle running N00940900228
properly and reliably. Spark plugs must fire properly for good
During cold weather You should also have an inspection and ser- engine performance and emission-control.
vice any time you suspect a malfunction. Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
Change them at the mileage listed in the
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
MANUAL”.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
NOTE
Emission-control system  Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine
maintenance specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are
N00940800328
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause
engine damage, performance problems or
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission- radio noise.
control system that meets all the requirements
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani- there are other parts which do not usually
Fuel hoses fold. need regular maintenance.
N00941000040
But, if any of these parts stops working prop-
Check the hose surfaces for any heat and erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
Have these items checked if you notice a
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe- problem with them.
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire. If you have any questions, see your autho-
all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance.
couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
Disc brake pads
damage, replace the hoses immediately.
N00941600059
Good brakes are essential for safe driving.

Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control Check the brake pads for wear. For good
9 N00950100050 system (except evaporative braking performance, replace the brake pads
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister) with the same type pads as the originals.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam- Brake hoses
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol- N00941700076
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
adjustments made by an authorized Brake hoses and tubing should be checked
Have the system checked at an authorized for:
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”. spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is
connection, and fuel tank filler showing through any cracks or worn spots
General maintenance in the rubber hose cover, the hose should
cap) be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
N00941300173 N00941500292
hose wears through.
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service  Improper installation may cause twisting,
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo- or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovat
i the
dedby:times listed,

For cold and snowy weather

 The underside or rear of the vehicle is nism until all the movable surfaces are cov-
Ball joint, steering linkage seals damaged ered.
and drive shaft boots Also, put a light coat of the same grease on
N00941800077 Also check the exhaust system each time the the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust For cold and snowy weather
 Ball joint boots of the front suspension fumes seep into the luggage and passenger N00942600102
and steering linkage compartments.

 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft Ventilation slots
Check for any of the following
Exhaust system conditions: The ventilation slots in front of the wind-
N00942200111 shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks snowfall so that the operation of the heating
WARNING caused by corrosion or damage. and ventilation systems will not be impaired. 9
 Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.
Weatherstripping
 Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
damage.
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should
from entering inside your vehicle is to have Hood lock release mechanism be treated with silicone grease.
the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- and safety catch
plete exhaust system and nearby body areas N00942500127
Additional equipment (For
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The hood lock release mechanism and hood regions where snow is encoun-
sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
ing: oiled when needed for easy movement and to tered)
prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose
 A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
tem parts of the hood latch and release lever. handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
 The smell of exhaust fumes inside the Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
vehicle stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fusible links
snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
useful. partment and in the engine compartment. Type A
Fusible links Passenger compartment

N00942700305
Type B
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if The fuse block in the passenger compartment
a large current attempts to flow through cer- is located in front of the driver’s seat at the
tain electrical systems. position shown in the illustration.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for inspection
and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
9 load capacities” on page 9-22.
Fuse load capacities
WARNING N00954801342
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any This fuse list shows the names of the electri-
other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
cal systems and their fuse capacities.
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
There are spare fuses in the fuse block in the
property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
engine compartment. Always replace a blown
Engine compartment fuse with one of the same capacity as the
original.
Fuses In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
N00942800902 located as shown in the illustration.
While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up the
Fuse block location cover.
To prevent damage to the electrical system

from short-circuiting or overloading, each I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuses
Sym- Capac-  The table above shows the main equip-
Passenger compartment fuse loca- No. Electrical system
bol ity ment corresponding to each fuse.
tion table
11 Rear fog light 10 A
Engine compartment fuse location
12 Door lock 15 A table
Interior light (Dome
13 15 A
light) Type A
14 Rear window wiper 15 A
15 Gauges 7.5 A
16 Relay 7.5 A
17 Heated seats 20 A
18 Option 10 A
Sym- Capac- 9
No. Electrical system Heated outside rear-
bol ity 19 7.5 A
view mirrors
1 Tail light (left) 7.5 A
20 Windshield wiper 20 A
2 Cigarette lighter 15 A
21 Back-up light 7.5 A
3 Ignition coil 10 A
22 Defogger 30 A
Sym- Capac-
4 Starter motor 7.5 A No. Electrical system
23 Heater 30 A bol ity
5 — — —
24 — — — SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A*
6 — — —
25 Radio 10 A Anti-lock braking
7 Tail light (right) 7.5 A SBF2 30 A*
Electronic con- system
Outside rearview 26 15 A
8 7.5 A trolled unit SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A*
mirrors
 Some fuses may not be installed on your Power window
9 Engine control unit 7.5 A SBF4 40 A*
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model control
10 Control unit 7.5 A or specifications.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Type B
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity
BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A F15 Alternator 7.5 A
BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A Hazard warning
F16 10 A
flasher
Headlight (low
F1 10 A Automatic trans-
beam) (left) F17 15 A
axle
Headlight (low
F2 10 A F18 Air conditioning 10 A
beam) (right)
Headlight (high F19 ETV 15 A
F3 10 A
beam) (left) Sym- Capac-
F20 Starter 7.5 A No. Electrical system
Headlight (high bol ity
F4 10 A F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A
beam) (right) SBF1 PTC heater 40 A*
9 F5 Horn 10 A F22 Fuel pump 15 A
SBF2 PTC heater 40 A*
F6 Front fog lights 15 A F23 Engine 20 A
SBF3 PTC heater 40 A*
Daytime running Automatic trans-
F7 10 A F24 7.5 A
lights axle *: Fusible link
F8 — — — #1 — Spare fuse 20 A
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
F9 — — — #2 — Spare fuse 30 A
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
Battery current or specifications.
F10 7.5 A *: Fusible link
sensor  The table above shows the main equip-
F11 — — —  Some fuses may not be installed on your ment corresponding to each fuse.
Stop lights (Brake vehicle, depending on the vehicle model

F12 15 A or specifications. The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
lights) 10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses
 The table above shows the main equip-
F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A ment corresponding to each fuse. burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
7.5 A: Outside rearview mirrors
F14 Engine control 7.5 A 10 A: Option
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuses
15 A: Cigarette lighter
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
ble.
Identification of fuse
Capacity Color
7.5 A Brown
10 A Red B- Fuse is OK
3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, C- Blown fuse
15 A Blue and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
20 A Yellow block.
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
30 A
Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible
securely into the appropriate slot. 9
link type)
40 A Green (fusible link type)
CAUTION
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than
Fuse replacement the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
N00954900131
to heat up and could cause a fire.
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a
the electrical item concerned to the fuse
short time, have the electrical system
and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
position or put the operation mode in dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
OFF. 4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
find and correct the cause.
2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine matching tables, to check the fuse that is
compartment fuse block. related to the problem. If the fuse is not
blown, something else must be causing
the problem. Have the system inspected
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or Ianforepair
r
mat
i
facility
onProvi
dedby:
of your choice.

Replacement of light bulbs
Replacement of light bulbs Bulb capacity

N00942900349 N00943000132
Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is The bulb should only be replaced with a new
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new bulb with the same rating and type. The type
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot. Outside
N00950301929
CAUTION Front
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
being turned off.
When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
NOTE
sufficiently before touching it. You could  If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, it is recommended that
9 otherwise be burned.
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
these procedures be carried out by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
inside halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
facility of your choice.
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.  Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens.
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc.  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb washed, the inside of the lens sometimes ANSI
to break the next time the headlights are becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
Watt- Trade No.
used. phenomenon as when window glass mists up Description
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
age or Bulb
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with type
alcohol and let it dry completely before tional problem.
installing the bulb. When the light is switched on, the heat will Front turn signal
remove the fog. However, if water gathers 1 27 W #1156NA
light
inside the light, please have it checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Headlight/Day-
repair facility of your choice. 2 time running light 60/55 W HB2
(if so equipped)
3 Parking light 5W W5W
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


ANSI Rear NOTE
Watt- Trade No.  The high-mounted stop light uses an LED
Description
age or Bulb rather than the bulbs. For repair and replace-
type ment, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Front fog light (if Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
4 55 W H11 choice.
so equipped)
Front side-marker
5 5W W5W
light Inside
Side turn signal N00950400646
6 light (on fender, if 5W —

so equipped) ANSI
Side turn signal trade No.
Item Wattage
light (on outside or bulb
7
rearview mirror, if
— — type 9
so equipped) High-mounted
1 — —
stop light
NOTE 2
License plate
5W W5W
 It is not possible to repair or replace only the light
bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender). 3 Back-up light 21 W P21W
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice Rear turn signal Item Wattage
4 21 W P21W
when the light needs to be repaired or light 1 Cargo room light 5W
replaced.
Rear side-marker 2 Dome light 8W
 The side turn signal light (on outside rear-
5 light, and tail and 21/5 W P21/5W
view mirror) uses an LED rather than the
stop light
bulb. For repair and replacement, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Headlights/Daytime running
repair facility of your choice. lights (if so equipped)
N00901800121
1. Pull out the connector (A), and then

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: remove the sealing cover (B).
Headlight aim adjustment

N00943200352
The alignment of the headlights should be

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Front side-marker lights

N00917300554
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

*- Front of the vehicle remove it.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal

2. Unhook the spring (C), which secures the steps in reverse.
bulb, and then remove the bulb (D).
9
Front turn signal lights
N00943400370
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.
*- Front of the vehicle
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

steps in reverse.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn- 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 2. Remove the clips/bolts (A) to turn up the
ing it counterclockwise while pressing in. cover (B).

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. 3. While pressing the tab (C), pull out the
steps in reverse. connector (D). 9
Front fog lights (if so equipped)
Parking lights N00943600763
N00917300567
1. To create enough work space, turn the
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to steering wheel all the way in the direction
remove it. opposite to the side you wish to replace.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


4. Turn the bulb (E) counterclockwise to 4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to
remove it.
Rear combination lights remove it.
N00943700490
1. Open the liftgate.

(Refer to “Liftgate” on page 5-27.)
2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light
unit.
D- Back-up light
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal E- Rear turn signal light
9 steps in reverse. F- Rear side-marker light, and tail and
stop light
NOTE
 When refitting each of the clips, first insert
3. Move the light unit toward the rear of the 5. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-
part (F) of the clip into the hole and then
press part (G) into it. vehicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C). ing it counterclockwise while pressing in.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Vehicle care precautions

6. To install the bulb, perform the removal 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
steps in reverse.
License plate light
N00944000403
1. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light

NOTE unit and remove the light unit.
 When mounting the lamp unit, align the
notch (G) and pin (H) on the lamp unit with
the clip (I) and hole (J) in the body.

steps in reverse.
9
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to Vehicle care precautions
remove it. N00945100166
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,

perform regular maintenance using the proper
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula-
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
in choosing these materials.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle
CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some  Do not use organic substances (solvents,  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
are poisonous and others are highly flamma- benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or tectants containing silicones or wax.
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their alkaline or acidic solutions. Such products, when applied to the instru-
fumes in a closed space. When you use any- These chemicals can cause discoloring, ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be staining or cracking of the surface. tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make Also, if such products get on the switches of
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re sure their ingredients do not include the sub- the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following stances mentioned above. ure of these accessories.
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Carbon Tetrachloride NOTE Upholstery
• Benzine  Always read the instructions on the cleaner N00945500128
• Kerosene label. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
• Naphtha
9 • Acetone
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
keep the interior clean.
• Turpentine Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner
flocked parts the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
N00945300142
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
• Nail Polish Remover priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
These can all be dangerous, and they all can and water. 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm
damage your vehicle. 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, water.
wring it out well, and wipe off all the 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet
Cleaning the inside of your soap.
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by
vehicle lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth
N00945200095 and spot remover.
After washing the inside of your vehicle with
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
lated area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
NOTE NOTE Washing

 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat  The genuine leather surface may harden and N00945900630
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
over the surface in one direction. for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-
place it in the shade as much as possible.
faces can damage the paint and body of your
 When the temperature of the vehicle interior
vehicle if left on.
Genuine leather (if so equipped) rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
N00945600187
stick to the seat. to protect your vehicle from this damage.
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen- Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
tle soap and water. Cleaning the outside of your water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, vehicle clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the N00945700058 wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
soap. Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- 9
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur- ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
face. carefully clean the joints and flanges of the
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
Foreign material remain.
NOTE N00945800033
 If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, CAUTION
may grow. tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other  When washing the underside of your vehicle
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged foreign matters can damage the finish on your or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber vehicle. tect your hands.
brush. Generally, the longer any foreign material  Never spray or splash water on the electrical
 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, stays on the finish, the worse the damage. parts in the engine compartment. This may
alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when- damage them. Be careful also when washing
can discolor the genuine leather surface and ever the finish gets soiled. the underbody to ensure that water does not
should not be used. enter the engine compartment.
 Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:


detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
CAUTION You should flush the underbody with a high
CAUTION
 Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-  Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
pressure hose every time you wash the out-
ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the should not be used. These waxes remove rust
side of your vehicle.
paint surface and make it dull. and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- Take special care to remove mud or other are harmful to the finish of the paint, because
ored vehicles. debris which could trap and hold salt and they also remove paint/clearcoat.
 Some hot water washing equipment uses moisture. They are also harmful to other glossy sur-
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. After washing your vehicle, wipe off all faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.
Because hot water can damage plastics parts waterdrops from the rubber parts around the  Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you doors to prevent the doors from freezing. paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt
do the following when using such equip- from the vehicle surface.
ment:  Do not put wax on the areas having black
• Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches
NOTE matte coating because it can cause uneven
(70 cm) away from the vehicle body.  When the door is frozen, opening it by force discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket wax on them, wipe the wax off right away
• When washing around the door glass, hold
9 the nozzle at a distance of more than 28
installed around the door. Pour warm water
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
with a soft cloth and warm water.
inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the
off the water after opening the door. To pre-
glass surface.
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
 Make sure to do the following when using an
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri- Polishing
automatic car wash, with help from either
cant. N00946100046
this manual or the car wash operator, to
avoid damaging your vehicle: If painted surfaces have been severely dam-
• Fold the outside rearview mirrors. aged and lost their original luster and color
• Remove the antenna. Waxing tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
• Tape the wiper arm assembly. N00946000234 polishing compound. Avoid limiting your
• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or polishing to the damaged surface only; polish
spoiler, check with the car wash operator when water does not bead up on the paint. a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing
before using the car wash. Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has the compound from the surface and apply a
During cold weather dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
Salt and other chemicals spread on winter You should wax when the painted surfaces
roads in some geographical areas can have a are cool.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Damaged paint CAUTION CAUTION

N00946200092  Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-  Do not use a brush or other hard implement
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, on the wheels.
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
should be touched up as soon as possible with
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains, sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
cracks, or discoloration. so could cause the coating on the wheels to
Check body areas facing the road or the tires If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe peel or become discolored or stained.
carefully for damage to the paint caused by them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
flying stones, etc. The paint code number for mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse cleaner or by any other means.
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle them immediately with water.  Contact with seawater or road salt used for
information code plate on the front passenger de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such
door sill. substances as soon as possible.
Chrome parts
N00946400052
Cleaning plastic parts To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome

N00946300194
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and
Window glass 9
N00946600054
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a The window glass can usually be cleaned
rough surface of the bumper, molding or commercially available chrome polish. using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
lights, the surface may appear white in color. can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
and a soft cloth or chamois.
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped) dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
N00946500183
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge.

CAUTION 2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-
Wiper blades
 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough N00946700068
not be removed easily with water.
scrubber as these may damage the plastic Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
Rinse off the detergent after washing the
surface.
wheel. grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois blades.
ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
leather or a soft cloth. Replace the wiper blades when they no longer
tic surface.
clean the windshield and rear window prop-
erly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Engine compartment
N00947000071
Never spray or splash water on the electrical

accessories in the engine compartment. This
puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
crack, stain or discolor them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
the affected parts with plenty of water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100171 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201528
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the North America, Inc.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition bean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
You can also obtain other informa- of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
tion about motor vehicle safety from SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
http://www.safercar.gov. Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to:  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Important facts to know in Many times, to save money, your insur-
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. case of an accident ance company will recommend imitation
P.O. Box 6066 N01047300232 parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
TAMUNING or workmanship.
GUAM 96931 accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely. Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
tection
For vehicles sold in Saipan In the event of an accident
The strength and integrity built into your
To contact Triple J Motors  Remain calm.
Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific
call (670)234-7133 or write to:  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to
design referred to as “Energy Management”.
the police, and, if necessary, call for an
Individual body parts are designed to act as
Triple J Motors ambulance.
one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
 Record all the details of the accident. This
10 P.O. Box 500487 will provide you with accurate records of
waves are absorbed by protective panels or
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 are channeled around the passenger compart-
the accident for discussions with your
ment. This important feature is possible
insurance company and other persons
because high tensile steel is used in
who may be acting on your behalf.
Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-
For vehicles sold in American thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-
Samoa Key information to discuss with facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
your insurance company Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets
are designed and constructed as important
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. protection features in the event of an acci-
 Understand your repair estimate before
call 684(699)9140 or write to: approving repairs. dent. By replacing body parts with non-Genu-
 Choosing the repair shop and the brands ine Mitsubishi Motors parts, your vehicle
Pacific Marketing, Inc. of parts that they use on your vehicle is may no longer meet original equipment spec-
P.O. Box 698 your decision. ifications.
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799 I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Important facts to know in case of an accident

Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Consumer rights (For vehicles Motors parts.
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of 10
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
replacements parts are your guarantee that
your vehicle will have all the technological
advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-3
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4
Battery ............................................................................................11-4
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Capacity .........................................................................................11-5
11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 2 - Vehicle identification num- Chassis number

N01147400742 ber plate
The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-
Keep a record of the chassis number and
head as shown in the illustration.
vehicle identification number. Such informa- The vehicle identification number is stamped
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen. on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine hood.
11
1 - Vehicle emission control
information label
The vehicle emission control information

label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
4 - Vehicle information code

plate
The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger
I
nfor door
mat
ionPr sill.
ovi
dedby:
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
Engine serial number Certification label

N01148200242
The engine serial number is stamped on the The certification label is located on the
cylinder block as shown in the illustration. driver’s door sill.
Vehicle dimensions 11
Tire and loading information N01147501577
placard Overall length 148.8 in (3,780 mm)

N01148100616
Overall width 65.6 in (1,665 mm)
The tire and loading information placard is
Overall height 59.4 in (1,510 mm)
located on the driver’s door sill.
Wheel base 96.5 in (2,450 mm)
Vehicle weights
N01147600917
Item M/T CVT

Gross vehicle weight rating 2,910 lb (1,320 kg) 3,020 lb (1,370 kg)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 11-3
Engine specifications
Item M/T CVT
Front 1,609 lb (730 kg)
Gross axle weight rating
Rear 1,477 lb (670 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
Engine specifications
N01147700514
Engine model 3A92

Engine displacement 72.8 CID (1,193 cm3)
11 No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-3

Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm)
Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.5:1
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)
Spark plugs NGK LZFR5BI-11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-2
Battery 55D23L (356CCA/99RC)

N01147800296
Battery is a 12 volt
I
nf
type.
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-4 Specifications
Tires and wheels

PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation
Tires and wheels holes)
N01147900747
Tire 165/65R14 NOTE

Size 14 x 4 1/2J  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details on the combination used on
Wheel PCD 3.93 in (100 mm) your vehicle.
Offset 1.81 in (46 mm)  These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions
described in this owner’s manual.
Capacity
N01148002130
Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel
9.2 gal (35 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2
(approximate)
Oil pan 2.9 qt (2.8 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
Engine oil
burst” symbol) on the container. 11
Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L) If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or
higher can be used.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO
Manual transaxle 1.7 qt (1.6 L)
API classification GL-4 SAE 75W-80
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.4 qt (7.0 L)
page 9-9.
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant M/T 4.2 qt (4.0 L)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium
{Includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in reserve
CVT 4.8 qt (4.6 L) or equivalent*
tank}
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 11-5
Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Washer fluid 2.6 qt (2.5 L) —
Refer to the “Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label” on HFC-134a
page 11-2.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-6 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive Capacities .......................................... 11-5
A shaft boots ....................................... 9-21 Card holder ...................................... 5-105
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-5 Battery .............................................. 9-10 Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-49 Charging system warning light ........ 5-73
Cargo room light
Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-10
Air bag .............................................. 4-21 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Disconnection and connection ......... 9-11
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 During cold weather ....................... 9-11 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-3
Air conditioning Specification.................................. 11-4 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Automatic air conditioning .............. 7-11 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..................... 5-81 Charging system warning light ............. 5-73
Important air conditioning operating tips..
Bottle holders.................................... 5-108 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-14
7-17
Manual air conditioning .................... 7-7 Brake Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-27
Fluid ............................................. 11-5 Cleaning
Air purifier ......................................... 7-18
Brake assist system............................. 5-46 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-32
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-35
Braking ............................................... 6-5 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-33
Antenna
Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-46 Clutch
Roof antenna .................................. 7-41
Hose ............................................. 9-20 Pedal free play................................ 9-18
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-46 Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-45 Consumer information......................... 10-2
Assist grip ........................................ 5-110 Parking brake................................. 5-31
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...
Audio Pedal............................................. 5-44
5-39
12
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with Pedal free play ............................... 9-18
Power brakes ................................. 5-44 Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-5
CD player .................................... 7-18 Selector lever operation ................... 5-40
Error codes..................................... 7-38 Service brake ................................. 5-44
Warning lights ............................... 5-72 Selector lever positions.................... 5-41
Handling of compact discs............... 7-40
Break-in recommendations.................... 5-2 Convenience hook............................. 5-109
Automatic air conditioning .................. 7-11
Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-26 Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5
Cruise control ..................................... 5-52
B
Back-up light
C Cup holders ...................................... 5-108
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26 California Perchlorate Materials

Requirements..................................... 3-7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-1
Alphabetical index
Compartment................................... 9-5 Replacement .................................. 9-29
D Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5 Switch ........................................... 5-77
Daytime running lights High coolant temperature warning light.... Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-3
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26 5-73
Front side-marker lights
Hood............................................... 9-4
Defogger (rear window) ...................... 5-80 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26
Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Replacement .................................. 9-28
Overheating..................................... 8-4
windows) ................................ 7-10, 7-16 Serial number ................................. 11-2 Front turn signal light
Dimensions ........................................ 11-3 Specification................................... 11-4 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26
Replacement .................................. 9-28
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ......... 5-76 Engine hood ........................................ 9-4
Fuel
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-20 Engine switch ..................................... 5-13
Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3
Dome light Error codes ......................................... 7-38 Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Exhaust system ................................... 9-21 Fuel hoses...................................... 9-20
Door-ajar warning buzzer .................... 5-74 Fuel remaining warning display ....... 5-66
Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Door-ajar warning light ....................... 5-74 F Tank capacity................................. 11-5
Doors Floor mat............................................. 6-2
Lock.............................................. 5-24 Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-20
Fluid
Power door locks ............................ 5-26 Fuel remaining display ........................ 5-66
Brake fluid ..................................... 11-5
12 Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) Fuses ................................................. 9-22
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2 fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-5 Fusible links....................................... 9-22
Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-5
Manual transaxle............................. 11-5
E Washer fluid ............................ 9-9, 11-5
G
Electric power steering system (EPS) ... 5-48 General maintenance
Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-5
Electric rear window defogger switch ... 5-80 Maintenance................................... 9-20
Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting General vehicle data............................ 11-3
(F.A.S.T.-key) ................................... 5-9
system) ..................................... 5-3, 5-20 Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6
Front fog lights
Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-19 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-26 Glove compartment........................... 5-108
Engine Indicators ....................................... 5-71
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-2
Alphabetical index
Indicator and warning light package ..... 5-70 Lubricants .......................................... 11-5
H Indicators .......................................... 5-71
Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-77 Information display ............................ 5-63 M
Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-71 Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-32 Malfunction indicator light .................. 5-72
Head restraints...................................... 4-7 Instrument panel light dimmer control .. 5-65 Manual air conditioning......................... 7-7
Headlights Interior lights .................................... 5-106 Manual transaxle................................. 5-38
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26 Oil.......................................... 9-9, 11-5
Dimmer ......................................... 5-76 Shift points..................................... 5-38
Headlight flasher ............................ 5-76 J
Manual window control....................... 5-28
Switch ........................................... 5-74 Jack
Garage jack up position..................... 9-2 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ..
Heater without air conditioning function . 7-4
Storage............................................ 8-5 3-5
High beam indicator............................ 5-71
Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2 Multi-information display .................... 5-62
High coolant temperature warning light 5-73
High-mounted stop light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26 K O
Key slot............................................. 5-19 Octane rating ........................................ 3-2
Hill start assist .................................... 5-45
Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-21 Oil
Hood lock release mechanism and safety
Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5
catch................................................ 9-21 Keys ................................................... 5-2
Manual transaxle oil................. 9-9, 11-5
12
Hook
Oil pressure warning light.................... 5-73
Convenience hook ........................ 5-109 L Operation mode .................................. 5-14
Horn switch........................................ 5-81 Labeling ............................................ 11-2
Operation under adverse driving conditions..
License plate light 8-18
I Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26
Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-33
If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2 Replacement .................................. 9-31
Overheating.......................................... 8-4
Ignition switch.................................... 5-35 Liftgate ............................................. 5-27
Important facts to know in case of an accident Link System....................................... 5-81
10-4
P
Loading information ............................. 6-6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Parking ................................................ 6-5
12-3
Alphabetical index
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-18 Rearview mirror Snow tires .......................................... 9-17
Parking brake ............................ 5-31, 9-18 Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-32 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-19
Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-33
Parking lights Starting the engine .............................. 5-36
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26 Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-26
Steering
Replacement .................................. 9-29 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-15 Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-48
Polishing............................................ 9-34 Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 Steering wheel height adjustment ..... 5-32
Power brakes...................................... 5-44 Stop lights
Power outlet ..................................... 5-106 S Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26
Replacement .................................. 9-30
Power windows .................................. 5-29 Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4
Storage spaces .................................. 5-107
Puncture (Tire changing) ..................... 8-11 Seat belts............................................. 4-8
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-12 Sun visors ........................................ 5-105
Child restraint systems..................... 4-14 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-21
R Front passenger seat belt warning light..... How the Supplemental Restraint System
Radio 4-11 works .......................................... 4-23
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-20 Maintenance service ....................... 4-35
CD player .................................... 7-18 Seat belt extender............................ 4-12
General information about your radio 7-42 Seat belt force limitter system .......... 4-14
Seat belt instructions ........................ 4-9
T
Rear combination lights
12 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26 Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-13 Tail light
Replacement .................................. 9-30 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-12 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26
Replacement .................................. 9-30
Rear seats ............................................ 4-5 Seats ................................................... 4-2
Front seats ....................................... 4-3 Tank capacity ..................................... 11-5
Rear shelf panel................................ 5-109
Head restraints ................................. 4-7 Tire
Rear side-marker lights Heated seats..................................... 4-4 Inflation pressures .......................... 9-14
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2 Maintenance................................... 9-16
Replacement .................................. 9-30
Service brake ...................................... 5-44 Quality grading .............................. 10-2
Rear turn signal light Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-15
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26 Service precautions .............................. 9-2
Rotation......................................... 9-16
Replacement .................................. 9-30 Side turn signal light Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5
Rear-view camera ............................... 5-60 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-26 Snow tires...................................... 9-17
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-4
Alphabetical index
To change a tire .............................. 8-11 Vehicle weights.................................. 11-3
Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-16 Vents .................................................. 7-2
Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-56
Tire repair kit ....................................... 8-6 W
Tires .................................................. 9-12 Warning lights ................................... 5-72
Tire and loading information placard 11-3
Washer
Tire chains ..................................... 9-17
Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-5
Tools ................................................... 8-5 Rear window washer ...................... 5-79
Storage ............................................ 8-5 Switch................................... 5-78, 5-79
Towing .............................................. 8-17 Washing ............................................ 9-33
Trailer towing..................................... 6-10 Waxing ............................................. 9-34
Turn signal light Weights ............................................. 11-3
Indicators....................................... 5-71
Wheel
Lever ............................................. 5-76
Covers........................................... 8-16
Specification.................................. 11-5
U Wiper
USB input terminal ........................... 5-101 Rear window wiper ........................ 5-79
How to connect a USB memory device .... Switch................................... 5-78, 5-79 12
5-101 Wiper blades.................................. 9-19
How to connect an iPod................. 5-102
V
Vanity mirror ................................... 5-105
Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-31
Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-3
Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-3
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
N09348201045
NOTE
Name of Owner Date of Purchase
Address of Owner Model of Vehicle
Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number
Maintenance record
Kilometers
Service Performed Date Inspection and Maintenance Item
Miles
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2015 Mirage PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Mirage PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BK0212400US.

book 1 ページ ２０１４年４月１日 火曜日 午後２時２１分

Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you

©2014 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Thailand

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Instrument cluster P.5-62

Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-77

Wiper and washer switch P.5-78

Cruise control switches

Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13

Supplemental restraint system-driver’s knee airbag

Instruments and controls

Electric rear window defogger switch

Engine hood release lever P.9-4 Glove compartment

Cup holder (for the rear seat)

Power window lock switch P.5-29 Bottle holders P.5-108

Sun visors P.5-105

Power window switch P.5-29

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-

Tether anchors for child restraint system

Spare wheel P.8-12 Tools P.8-5

Power window (if so equipped) P.5-29

Windshield wipers P.5-78 Outside rearview mirrors P.5-33

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)

Front side- marker lights

High-mounted stop light

Rear side- marker lights/Tail and stop lights

Back-up light P.9-26, 9-30

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

2-2 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Quick index 2-3

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

The engine does not start when

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

The engine does not start.

The engine is overheated.

Steam comes out of the engine

2-6 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Quick index 2-7

Your vehicle is designed to operate on

3-2 General information

book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分